Operation Manual

No.
PS##-OMO0002
PRODUCT NAME
Digital Pressure Switch

MODEL / Series / Product Number
ZSE3 ISE3(L)
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model Identification and how to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and Installation Piping Wiring Pressure Setting 2-output type 1-output type with the failure predictive function Other Settings Maintenance Troubleshooting Specification Specifications Dimensions 2 8 9 10 12 12 13 15 15 16 17 18 20 24 24 26
-1No.PS##-OMO0002
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International standards (ISO/IEC)*1) and other safety regulations.
*1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power -- General rules relating to systems ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power -- General rules relating to systems IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery -- Electrical equipment of machines (Part 1: General requirements) ISO 10218-1: Manipulating industrial robots -Safety. etc.
Caution : Warning : Danger :
CAUTION indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. WARNING indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications. Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results. The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its latest catalog information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the equipment. 2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment. The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced. 3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed. 1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed. 2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products carefully. 3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction. 4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions. 1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight. 2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard specifications described in the product catalog. 3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis. 4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical protective function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
-2No.PS##-OMO0002
Caution
The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries. The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing industries. If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange specifications or a contract if necessary. If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
Limited warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements

The product used is subject to the following "Limited warranty and Disclaimer" and "Compliance Requirements". Read and accept them before using the product.
Limited warranty and Disclaimer

1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered.2) Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
2) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty. A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered. Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad or failure due to the deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.
Compliance Requirements
1. The use of SMC products with production equipment for the manufacture of weapons of mass destruction (WMD) or any other weapon is strictly prohibited. 2. The exports of SMC products or technology from one country to another are governed by the relevant security laws and regulation of the countries involved in the transaction. Prior to the shipment of a SMC product to another country, assure that all local rules governing that export are known and followed.
-3No.PS##-OMO0002
Operator
This operation manual is intended for those who have knowledge of machinery using pneumatic equipment, and have sufficient knowledge of assembly, operation and maintenance of such equipment. Only those persons are allowed to perform assembly, operation and maintenance. Read and understand this operation manual carefully before assembling, operating or providing maintenance to the product.
Safety Instructions
Warning
Do not disassemble, modify (including changing the printed circuit board) or repair.
An injury or failure can result.
Do not operate the product outside of the specifications.

Do not use for flammable or harmful fluids. Fire, malfunction, or damage to the product can result. Verify the specifications before use.
Do not operate in an atmosphere containing flammable or explosive gases.

Fire or an explosion can result. This product is not designed to be explosion proof.
Do not use the product in a place where static electricity is a problem.

Otherwise it can cause failure or malfunction of the system.
If using the product in an interlocking circuit: Provide a double interlocking system, for example a mechanical system Check the product regularly for proper operation
Otherwise malfunction can result, causing an accident.
The following instructions must be followed during maintenance: Turn off the power supply Stop the air supply, exhaust the residual pressure and verify that the air is released before performing maintenance
Otherwise an injury can result.
Caution
Do not touch the terminals and connectors while the power is on.
Otherwise electric shock, malfunction or damage to the product can result.
After maintenance is complete, perform appropriate functional inspections and leak tests.
Stop operation if the equipment does not function properly or there is a leakage of fluid. When leakage occurs from parts other than the piping, the product might be faulty. Disconnect the power supply and stop the fluid supply. Do not apply fluid under leaking conditions. Safety cannot be assured in the case of unexpected malfunction.
-4No.PS##-OMO0002
NOTE
Follow the instructions given below when designing, selecting and handling the product. The instructions on design and selection (installation, wiring, environment, adjustment, operation, maintenance, etc.) described below must also be followed.
Product specifications Use the specified voltage.
Otherwise failure or malfunction can result.
Do not exceed the specified maximum allowable load.

Otherwise it can cause damage or shorten the lifetime of the Pressure switch.
Design the product to prevent reverse current when the circuit is opened or the product is forced to operate for operational check.
Reverse current can cause malfunction or damage to the product.
Input data to the Pressure switch is not deleted, even if the power supply is cut off. (Writing time: 1,000,000 times, Data duration: 10 years after power off) For the details of compressed air quality, refer to ISO 8573-1, 1.1.2 to 1.6.2: 2001.
This can cause operating failure. If compressed air containing condensate is used, install an air dryer or drain catch before the filter and perform drainage regularly. If drainage is not performed regularly and condensate enters the secondary side, it can cause operating failure of pneumatic equipment. If regular drainage is difficult, the use of a filter with an auto drain is recommended.
Applicable fluid is air, inert gases and incombustible gases.

Do not use a fluid containing chemicals, synthetic oils including organic solvent, salt and corrosive gases. Otherwise, damage to the product and malfunction can result. Check the details of the specifications before using.
Use the specified measurement flow rate and operating pressure.

Otherwise it can cause damage to the pressure switch or inability to measure correctly.
Reserve a space for maintenance.

Allow sufficient space for maintenance when designing the system.
Product handling
Installation Tighten to the specified tightening torque.
If the tightening torque is exceeded the mounting screws and brackets may be broken. If the tightening torque is insufficient, the product can be displaced and loosen the mounting screws. (Refer to "Mounting and Installation" on page 12.)
Be sure to ground terminal FG when using a commerically available switch-mode power supply. Do not drop, hit or apply shock to the Pressure switch.
Otherwise damage to the internal parts can result, causing malfunction.
Do not pull the lead wire forcefully, not lift the product by pulling the lead wire. (Tensile force 49N or less)
Hold the body when handling to avoid the damage of the Pressure switch which lead to cause the failure and malfunction.
For piping of the Pressure switch, hold the piping with a spanner on the metal part of the piping (Piping attachment).
Holding other part with spanner leads to damage the Pressure switch.
Eliminate any dust left in the piping by air blow before connecting the piping to the product.
Otherwise it can cause damage or malfunction.
-5No.PS##-OMO0002
Do not insert metal wires or other foreign matter into the pressure measurement port.
It can damage the pressure sensor causing failure or malfunction.
Never mount a Pressure switch in a location that will be used as a foothold.

The product may be damaged if excessive force is applied by stepping or climbing onto it.
If the entering of foreign material to the fluid is possible, install and pipe the filter or the mist separator to the inlet to avoid failure and malfunction. Wiring Do not pull the lead wires.
In particular, never lift a Pressure switch equipped with fitting and piping by holding the lead wires. Otherwise damage to the internal parts can result, causing malfunction or to be off the connector.
Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching the lead wire, or placing heavy load on them.
Repetitive bending stress or tensile stress can cause the sheath of the wire to peel off, or breakage of the wire. If the lead wire can move, fix it near the body of the product. The recommended bend radius of the lead wire is 6 times the outside diameter of the sheath, or 33 times the ouside diameter of the insulation material, whichever is larger. Replace the damaged lead wire with a new one.
Wire correctly.
Incorrect wiring can break the Pressure switch.
Do not perform wiring while the power is on.

Do not route wires and cables together with power or high voltage cables.
Otherwise the product can malfunction due to interference of noise and surge voltage from power and high voltage cables to the signal line. Route the wires (piping) of the product separately from power or high voltage cables.
Confirm proper insulation of wiring.

Poor insulation (interference from another circuit, poor insulation between terminals, etc.) can lead to excess voltage or current being applied to the product, causing damage.
Design the system to prevent reverse current when the product is forced to operate for operational check.
Depending on the circuit used, insulation may not be maintained when operation is forced, allowing reverse current to flow, which can cause malfunction and damage the product.
Keep wiring as short as posible to prevent interference from electromagnetic noise and surge voltage.
Do not use a cable longer than 10m. Wire the DC(-) line (blue) as close as possible to the power supply.
When analog output is used, install a noise filter (line noise filter, ferrite element, etc.) between the switch-mode power supply and this product. Environment Do not use the product in area that is exposed to corrosive gases, chemicals, sea water, water or steam.
Do not use in a place where the product could be splashed by oil or chemicals.
If the product is to be used in an environment containing oils or chemicals such as coolant or cleaning solvent, even for a short time, it may be adversely affected (damage, malfunction, or hardening of the lead wires).
Do not use in an area where surges are generated.

If there is equipment which generates a large amount of surge (solenoid type lifter, high frequency induction furnace, motor, etc.) close to the Pressure switch, this may cause deterioration or breakage of the internal circuit of the Pressure switch. Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines.
Do not use a load which generates surge voltage.

When a surge-generating load such as a relay or solenoid is driven directly, use a Pressure switch with a built-in surge absorbing element.
The product is CE marked, but not immune to lightning strikes. Take measures against lightning strikes in the system.
-6No.PS##-OMO0002
Mount the product in a place that is not exposed to vibration or impact.

Prevent foreign matter such as remnant of wires from entering the Pressure switch.
Take proper measures for the remnant not to enter the Pressure switch in order to prevent failure or malfunction.
Do not use the product in an environment that is exposed to temperature cycle.

Heat cycles other than ordinary changes in temperature can adversely affect the inside of the product.
Do not expose the product to direct sunlight.

If using in a location directly exposed to sunlight, shade the product from the sunlight. Otherwise failure or malfunction can result.
Keep within the specified fluid and ambient temperatures range.

The fluid and ambient temperatures should be 0 to 60 C. Operation under low temperature (5 C or less) leads to cause damage or operation failure due to frozen moist in the fluid or air. Protection against freezing is necessary. Air dryer is recommended for elimination of drain and water. Avoid sudden temperature change even within specified temperature.
Do not operate close to a heat source, or in a location exposed to radiant heat.

Otherwise malfunction can result.
Adjustment and Operation Turn the power on after connecting a load.

Otherwise it can cause excess current causing instantaneous breakage of the Pressure switch.
Do not short-circuit the load.

Although error is displayed when the Pressure switch load is short circuit, generated excess current lead to cause the damage of the Pressure switch.
Do not press the setting buttons with a sharp pointed object.

It may damage the setting buttons.
If using the product to detect very small pressure rates, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes first.
There will be a drift on the display and the analog output of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on, within 10 minutes.
Perform settings suitable for the operating conditions.

Incorrect setting can cause operation failure. For details of each setting, refer to page 15 to17 of this manual.
Do not touch the LCD during operation.

The display can vary due to static electricity.
Maintenance Turn off the power supply, stop the supplied air, exhaust the residual pressure and verify the release of air before performing maintenance.
There is a risk of unexpected malfunction.
Perform regular maintenance and inspections.

Perform drainage regularly.

If condensate enters the secondary side, it can cause operating failure of pneumatic equipment.
Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner etc. to clean the Pressure switch.
They could damage the surface of the body and erase the markings on the body. Use a soft cloth to remove stains. For heavy stains, use a cloth soaked with diluted neutral detergent and fully squeezed, then wipe up the stains again with a dry cloth.
When the 0X or 0XY type (with filter) is used If the filter element (ZX1-FE) is clogged, stop operation and replace theelement.
-7No.PS##-OMO0002
Model Identification and how to order
-8No.PS##-OMO0002
Summary of Product parts

Names of individual parts
RESET button: Resets at error occurrence and for zero clear of the display. SET button: Switches the setting mode and enters the set value. LCD: Displays pressure value, setting mode, and error code. LED: The green LED lights up when output OUT1 is ON. The red LED lights up when output OUT2 is ON and failure predictive output. When both OUT1 and OUT2 are ON, both the green and red LEDs light up. Upon error occurrence, the red LED flashes. button (UP): Switches to the peak display mode and increases the ON/OFF set value. button (DOWN): Switches to the bottom display mode and decreases the ON/OFF set value.
-9No.PS##-OMO0002
Definition and terminology

Terms 7 A B D Digit (Min. setting unit) E F 7-segment indication Analog output (function) Bottom hold mode Meaning When "8" is shown on the display. It is called 7-segment because 8 consists of 7 pieces of "- (segments)". Function to output the voltage or current in proportion to the pressure. Shows the minimum pressure reached at that moment. Shows how precisely the pressure can be indicated or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1kPa, e.g., 1, 2, 3, , 99, 100. With the self-diagnosis function given to the Pressure switch, it indicates that there is a failure which could cause a switch failure. Refer to "Failure predictive funcyion" on page 16. Abbreviation for full span and full scale; means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. For example, when the output voltage is 1 to 5[V], the F.S. will be 5-1 = 4[V]. (Reference: 1%F.S. = 4 0.01 = 0.04[V]) Difference between the points at which the Pressure switch is turned on and off. Refer to "Output method" on page 15 Insulation resistance of a product itself. The resistance between an electric circuit and a body. See "Max. load impedance". The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output line of the NPN output. The maximum current available to the output (output line) of the switch output. The maximum (minimum) load (resistance value and impedance) which can be connected to the output (output line) of the analog current output. Refer to "digit". The switch that uses the NPN transistor for output. The resistance value of a component between the voltage outputting element and the output line at the output of the analog voltage output. It is indicated as a resistance value which is converted in accordance with the condition in which resistance is directly connected to the voltage output element. There may be an error in the output voltage depending on this output impedance and the input impedance of customers' equipment. (Example: If the Pressure switch with output impedance of 1k is connected to the A/D converter to detect the analog output of 5V, the detected voltage by the A/D converter becomes 5(V) 1(M)/(1(k) + 1(M)) 4.995(V), and there is an error of approximate 0.005 V.) Shows the maximum pressure reached at that moment. The size of the port on the switch body with which a device and the switch are connected. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off.
Error indication (Error code) Failure predictive funcyion F.S. (full span/full scale)
Hysteresis Hysteresis mode
I L M
Insulation resistance Load impedance Max. applied voltage Max. load current Max. (Min.) load impedance Min. setting unit
N O
NPN (open collector) (output)
Output impedance
Peak hold mode Piping-port size Pressure setting
-10No.PS##-OMO0002
Terms R Rated pressure range
Meaning The pressure range in which the Pressure switch satisfies the specifications. Values over this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot assured the specifications to be satisfied. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes at a temperature of 25 oC. The elapsed time until the ON-OFF output begins working since the pressure supplied for the Pressure switch has reached the set value. Generally, the shorter response time is, the better the performance is. A type of chattering. Durability to voltage applied between an electric circuit and a body. A product's durability in withstanding voltage. If more voltage is applied to the product, the product may be broken. (Voltage mentioned here is not power voltage to activate the product.) An output type that holds the output when the pressure is within a certain range. (Refer to "Output method" on page 15.) Adjusts the displayed pressure value to "zero".
Repeatability
Response time Ripple V Voltage resistance
W Z
Window comparator mode Zero clear (function)
-11No.PS##-OMO0002
Mounting and Installation

Piping
Piping connection
Connect the digital pressure to the piping with a hexagon socket head plug or a fitting. The tightening torque for piping port must be 8.8 Nm or less.
-12No.PS##-OMO0002
Wiring
Connection
Be sure to turn off the power supply before performing connection work. Incorrect wiring will lead to digital pressure switch breakdown, failure or malfunction. So be sure to confirm the wire color and terminal number before wiring.
*: The symbol shown in [ ] means the pin assignment of connector connection type.
Connector
Connecting/Disconnecting When connecting a connector, insert the connector straight by tightly holding its lever and body with fingers and lock it, making sure the lever hook is securely received in the groove of the housing. When disconnecting the connector, pull it straight away from the housing by pressing the lever with the thumb and removing the lever hook from the groove.
-13No.PS##-OMO0002
Internal circuit and wiring example
-21 Switch output NPN open collector output 2 outputs Max. 30 V, 80 mA
-22 Switch output NPN open collector output 2 outputs Max. 30 V, 80 mA Analog output: 1 to 5V (5%F.S.) Output impedance: Approx. 1 k
-23 Switch output NPN open collector output 1 output Max. 30 V, 80 mA Failure predictive output NPN open collector output 1 output
-24 Switch output NPN open collector output 1 output Max. 30 V, 80 mA Failure predictive output NPN open collector output 1 output Analog output: 1 to 5V (5%F.S.) Output impedance: Approx. 1 k
-14No.PS##-OMO0002
Pressure Setting
2-output type
1. Set value input mode Press the "SET" button to display "P1-20" 1. The output OUT1(1) set value input mode is selected.
1: If the set value of P1 is -20)
2. OUT1(1) set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. button decreases the set value. Pressing the Press the "SET" button to save the set value and select the output OUT1(2) set value input mode. The set value of P2 is displayed. 3. OUT1(2) set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. button decreases the set value. Pressing the Press the "SET" button to save the set value and select the output OUT1(1) set value input mode. The set value of P3 is displayed. 4. OUT2(1) set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. Pressing the button decreases the set value. Press the "SET" button to save the set value and select the output OUT2(2) set value input mode. The set value of P4 is displayed. 5. OUT2(2) set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. button decreases the set value. Pressing the Press the "SET" button to save the set value and exit this mode.
: P1: Set value for OUT1(1) P2: Set value for OUT1(2) P3: Set value for OUT2(1) P4: Set value for OUT2(2)
Output method
Hysteresis mode (P1P2, P3P4) Window comparator mode (P1P2, P3P4)
: Hysteresis mode (same as for positive pressure use) When the value of hysteresis is set to 2 digits or less, the switching output might chatter due to fluctuation of the input pressure around its set point. Window comparator mode (same as for positive pressure use) since the hysteresis will be 3 digits, separate P1 from P2 (in case of 2-output type, same as for P3 and P4) by 7 digits or more. : 1 digit is the minimum pressure display unit.
-15No.PS##-OMO0002
1-output type with the failure predictive function

1. Set value input mode Press the "SET" button to display "P1-50" 1. The output OUT1(1) set value input mode is selected.
1: If the set value of P1 is -50)
2. OUT1(1) set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. button decreases the set value. Pressing the Press the "SET" button to save the set value and select the output OUT1(2) set value input mode. The set value of P2 is displayed. 3. OUT1(2) set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. button decreases the set value. Pressing the Press the "SET" button to save the set value and select the failure predictive pressure set value input mode. The failure predictive set value is displayed. 4. Failure predictive pressure set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. Pressing the button decreases the set value. Press the "SET" button to save the set value and select the failure predictive count set value input mode. The failure predictive count set value is displayed. 5. Failure predictive count set value input Pressing the button increases the set value. button decreases the set value. Pressing the Press the "SET" button to save the set value and exit this mode.
: P1: Set value for OUT1(1) P2: Set value for OUT1(2) P3: Set value for failure predictive pressure EC: Set value for failure predictive count
Failure predictive function
The failure predictive detection counter is incremented when the switch is turned on then is turned off, without the pressure (exceeding P1) not reaching the failure predictive pressure (P3). The failure predictive detection output is energized when the set failure predictive counter (EC) is incremented consecutively. When the switch is turned ON and the pressure (exceeding P1) exceeds the failure predictive pressure (P3), the failure predictive counter is reset. (This example shows a case in the hysteresis mode.)
-16No.PS##-OMO0002
Other Settings
Peak hold mode
Pressing the button when pressure is displayed enables the upper limit peak value (value with a high degree of vacuum) to be held. In this case, "H" is displayed on the LCD. To reset holding, press the button again.
Bottom hold mode

Pressing the button when pressure is displayed enables the lower limit peak value (value with low vacuum) to be held. In this case "d" is displayed on the LCD. To return holding, press the button again.
Bottom hold mode

Pressing the RESET button causes the following 1. Measurement mode Zero clear Clearing the peak hold mode or bottom hold mode Clearing the failure predictive function internal counter Resetting the failure predictive output 2. Upon error occurrence The data set in the setting mode is retained as is and the state when the power supply was turned on is restored (System reset is triggered). In case of a data error, the setting mode is selected. When you finish setting, the state when the power supply was turned on is restored (System reset is triggered).
: In the set value input mode, the reset function does not work.
-17No.PS##-OMO0002
Maintenance
How to reset the product for power cut or forcible de-energizing The setting of the product is remained as that before power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that befor power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of whole facility before operating the product. If the facility is under accurate control, wait until it has warmed up. (Approximate 10 minutes)
Replacement of elements
If element clogging causes deterioration of the adsorption force or slows the response time, stop operation and replace the element. Filter element part no.: ZX1-FE Confirm that a filter gasket is seated in the groove before reassembling the parts. Filter gasket part no.: ZX1-FG
Filter cases
The case is made of polycarbonate. Therefore, do not use it in an environment that is exposed to chemicals such as thinner, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, acetic ester, aniline, cyclohexane, trichloroethylene, sulfuric acid, lactic acid, or water-soluble cutting oil (alkalinic). Operate it away from direct sunlight.
-18No.PS##-OMO0002
Connector wiring
Crimping of lead wire and socket Strip 3.2 to 3.7 mm at the tip of the lead wire and enter the core wires neatly into a socket and crimp with a crimping tool. In this case, be sure that the cover of the lead wire does not enter the core wire crimping area (Crimping tool: Model DXT170-75-1). Attachment of socket with lead wire Insert a socket into a square hole in the connector (+, 1, 2, indication provided). Holding by the lead wire, push it all the way in until the hook on the socket catches and locks in the seat of the connector. (When the lead wire is pushed in, the hook widen and locks it automatically.) Then pull the lead wire gently to confirm that it is locked. Removal of socket with lead wire To remove a socket from the connector, pull the lead wire out while pushing in the sockets hook using a bar with a thin end (approximately 1 mm). If the socket is to be reused, widen the hook outward.
-19No.PS##-OMO0002
Troubleshooting
Cross-reference for troubleshooting
Reference No. Problem Output remains on. LED remains on. Output remains off. LED remains off. Output remains on. LED works correctly. Possible cause Investigation method Countermeasure
Wrong pressure setting
(1) Check the set pressure.
(1) Reset the pressure setting.
Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure Incorrect wiring Check the wiring of the output line. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire. (Bending radius and tensile force applied to the lead wire) Check the wiring. Check if the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure). (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check if the hysteresis range is too narrow. Check the wiring of the output line. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-).
Replace the product. Correct the wiring. Replace the product. Correct the wiring. Correct the wiring conditions. (Adjust the tensile force and widen the bending radius.) Replace the product.
Output remains off. LED works correctly.
Lead wire breakage Product failure
Incorrect wiring 4 Switch output generates chattering. Wrong setting Product failure
Correct the wiring.
(1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Widen the hysteresis. Replace the product. Reset the pressure setting. Set up the pressure setting value so it is not too close to the detected pressure value. Correct the wiring.
Slow switch output response
Incorrect pressure setting
Check the pressure setting. Check if the detected pressure and the set pressure value have the same value or are too close. Check if the analog output line is connected with a load. (1) Check if the proper load is connected. (2) Check if input impedance of input equipment (A/D transformer) is proper. Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy in 10 minutes after supplying power.
Incorrect wiring Non-compliance with the load spec.
Analog output is not provided. (Specified accuracy is not satisfied.)
Connect a proper load.
Insufficient warm-up
After energizing, indication and output can drift. For detecting fine pressure, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product.
Product failure
-20No.PS##-OMO0002
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause
Investigation method (1) Check if a current of 80mA or more is flowing to the output. (2) Check if the connected load satisfies the specifications, and if the load is shorted. (3) Check if a relay without a surge voltage suppressor is connected. (4) Check if the wiring is in the same route as (or bundled together with) a high-voltage line or the power line. (1) Check if there is noise interference such as static electricity. Check if there is a noise source (2) Check if the power supply voltage is in the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Countermeasure
Over current to the output (E2, CE1, 2)
An over current error (E2, CE1, 2) is indicated.
(1)(2) Connect the load as specified. (3) Use a relay with a surge voltage suppressor or take a measure to prevent noise. (4) Separate the wiring from the high-voltage line and/or power line.
System error
7 (Er, 1dE) is indicated. The display shows "E3 PE". Residual pressure error (E4 HP) is indicated.
Improper transaction of the internal data of the Pressure switch (Er, 1dE)
(1), (2) Press the RESET button and set all data again.
Applied pressure is over the upper limit (E3 PE). Pressure is not atmospheric pressure at zero clear operation (E4 HP) Product failure Incorrect power supply
(1) Check if the pressure is supplied 0.5 MPa or more (Positive pressure type is 0.98 MPa) (2) Check if foreign matter got into the piping.
(1) Bring the pressure back within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from getting into the piping. Return the applied pressure to atmospheric pressure, and retry the zero clear operation. Replace the product.
Check if the pressure over 7%F.S. of the atmospheric pressure is applied.
Check if the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Supply power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Indicated values fluctuate.
Incorrect wiring
Check the wiring to the power supply. Check if the brown and blue wires are Correct the wiring. connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure). If the fluctuation is not acceptable, the number of digit can be changed by the setting of the resolution of display.
Factory pressure Check if the factory pressure is change changed.
-21No.PS##-OMO0002
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause Incorrect power supply
Investigation method Check if the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check the power supply wiring. Check if the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure).
Countermeasure Supply power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Indicator turns off. 9 A part of the indication misses.
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Product failure
Replace the product. Install a 5 m filter to prevent foreign matter from getting into the pressure port. Also, clean the filter regularly to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the piping. If excessive tightening torque over the specified range is applied, a mounting screw, mounting bracket, and product may be broken. After energizing, indication and output can drift. For detecting fine pressure, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product. Rework the piping. If excessive tightening torque over the specified range is applied, a mounting screw, mounting bracket, and product may be broken. Replace the product.
Foreign matter
Check if foreign matter has entered the pressure port.
10
The pressure indication accuracy does not satisfy the specifications.
Air and liquid leakage
Check if air and liquid are leaking from the piping.
Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy 10 minutes after supplying power.
Product failure
11
Noisy.
Check if air liquid are leaking from the piping.
Product failure
-22No.PS##-OMO0002
Error indication function

This function is to display error location and content when a problem or an error occurs.
Error Display Error Type The set data has been changed under some influences. Load of OUT1 has short-circuited and overcurrent is flowing. Load of OUT2 has short-circuited and overcurrent is flowing. Pressure exceeding 0.5 MPa has been applied. (In case of positive pressure, pressure exceeding the rated pressure has been applied.) Compared with the ambient pressure, -0.07 MPa (in case of 1 MPa use) or -7 kPa or more (in case of vacuum use or 100 kPa use) has been applied during zero clear. Troubleshooting Method Press the RESET button and set all data again. Turn off the power supply and replace the load connected to the OUT1 (black wire). Turn off the power supply and replace the load connected to the OUT2 (white wire). Lower the pressure to 0.5 MPa or less. (In case of positive pressure, lower the pressure to the rated pressure or less.)
After adjusting the pressure to the ambient pressure, perform RESET operation.
If the error can not be reset after the above measures are taken, then please contact SMC.
-23No.PS##-OMO0002
Specification
Specifications
Model No. Rated pressure range Min. display unit Applicable fluid Max. operating pressure Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Response time Repeatability Hysteresis mode Hystere Window comparator sis 4-2 mode Analog output 2-3 Display method Indicator light
3-4
ZSE3 (Vacuum) 0 to -101 kPa
ISE3L (Positive pressure 100 kPa) 0 to 98 kPa 1 kPa
ISE3 (Positive pressure 1 MPa) 0 to 0.98 MPa 0.01 MPa 1 MPa
Air, inert gases and incombustible gases 200 kPa *1 25 mA or less NPN open collector output 80 mA 30 VDC 5 msec 1F.S. Variable (0 digits or more) Fixed (3 digits) Voltage output: 1 to 5 V5 Output impedance: Approx. 1 k 3 1/2 digits LCD (character height 5 mm) Light when ON OUT1: Green OUT2: Red Detection of overcurrent, overpressure, data error and pressure during zero clear Indicator: Red flashing, Error code is displayed LCD IP40 0 to 60 oC (No condensation or freezing) 1000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 minute, Between the external terminal and the case 2 M (at 500 VDC) Between the external terminal and the case 3F.S. R1/8: M5x0.8 NPTF1/8: M5x0.8 With suction filter : M5x0.8 (M6x1 (made to order)) 12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (P-P) 10 or less (Protected against inverse connection)
Self-diagnosis function Error indication Enclosure Environ mental Ambient temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Temperature characteristic
Port size
R1/8: M5x0.8 NPTF1/8M5x0.8
Connector type Lead wire Standard Weight Grommet type
Heat-resistant vinyl electric wire, 4-wire, Cross section: 0.31 mm2, Insulator O.D.: 1.55 mm Oil-resistant vinyl cabtire code -21, -23: 4 cores, 3.5, Cross section: 0.14 mm2, Insulator O.D.: 1.0 mm -22, -24: 5 cores, 3.5, Cross section: 0.15 mm2, Insulator O.D.: 1.0 mm CE, RoHS 40 g(including lead wire 0.6 m)
1: When vacuum is used, there is no influence on the switch even if 0.5 MPa of pressure is supplied instantaneously. 2: Window comparator mode: Since the hysteresis is 3 digits, P1 should be separated from P2 by 7 digits or more. 1 digit is the minimum pressure display unit. (See the table above) 3: Only for the pressure switch with analog output selected. 4: In case of ZSE3-23 or 24, failure predictive output: Red.
-24No.PS##-OMO0002
Analog output
Model No. ZSE3 ISE3L ISE3
Rated pressure range 0 to -101 kPa 0 to 98 kPa 0 to 0.98 MPa
A 0 0 0
B -101 kPa 98 kPa 0.98 MPa
-25No.PS##-OMO0002
Dimensions
Grommet type Z/ISE3-01/T1-
-26No.PS##-OMO0002
Connector type Z/ISE3-01/T1-C
-27No.PS##-OMO0002
Single-installation type
Grommet type ZSE3-0X-
-28No.PS##-OMO0002
ZSE3-0X--D
-29No.PS##-OMO0002
Connector type ZSE3-0X-C
-30No.PS##-OMO0002
ZSE3-0X-C-D
-31No.PS##-OMO0002
Revision history
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2010 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved No.PS##-OMO0002
No.PS##-OMJ0004
PRODUCT NAME

ISE35
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model Identification and how to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and installation Wiring Pressure Setting Setting of Function Default settings Other Settings Maintenance Troubleshooting Specification Specifications Dimensions 2 8 9 10 12 12 13 14 14 24 27 28 35 35 36
-1No.PS##-OMJ0004
Safety Instructions
Warning
-2No.PS##-OMJ0004
Caution


-3No.PS##-OMJ0004
Operator
Safety Instructions
Warning



Caution
-4No.PS##-OMJ0004
NOTE
Product specifications The direct current power supply to be used should be UL approved as follows.
Circuit (of Class2) which is of maximum 30 Vrms (42.4 V peak) or less, with UL1310 Class2 power supply unit or UL1585 Class2 transformer.
The Pressure switch is a approved product only if it has a mark on the body. The Pressure switch designed only for the measurement of compressed air (including vacuums).
The compressed air must contain no chemicals, synthetic oil with organic solvent, salts nor corrosive gas. Air that includes these substances can cause damage or malfunction of the Pressure switch. Verify the specifications carefully before use.
Do not use the Pressure switch for compressed air containing plenty of condensed water.
Otherwise it can cause malfunction of the Pressure switch. When measuring the air with condensed water, install an air dryer / drain catch before a filter, and drain the condensed water regularly. Improper draining of condensed water allows the flow with condensed water into the secondary side and causes malfunction of pneumatic equipment. Use of the filter with an auto drain is recommended when the draining is difficult to perform. Compressed air quality should comply with JIS B 8392-1 1.1.2 through 1.6.2:2003.
Use the specified voltage.

Operation with a voltage outside of specifications can cause malfunction or damage of the Pressure switch. Insufficient voltage may not drive a load due to a voltage drop inside the Pressure switch. Verify the operating voltage of the load before use.
Use the Pressure switch within the specified ranges of the measurement flow rate and operating pressure.
Otherwise it can cause damage to the Pressure switch and abnormal measurement. Do not apply a constant pressure higher than 0.5 MPa to vacuum Pressure switch. (Specifications: -101 to 101 kPa)

Input data to the Pressure switch is not erased after the power is off.
(Writing time: 100,000 times, Data duration: 10 years after power off.)

Consider a space for maintenance when designing whole system.
-5No.PS##-OMJ0004
Product handling
Installation Do no drop, hit or apply shock to the Pressure switch.
Otherwise it can result in damage to the Pressure switch causing failure or malfunction.
Do not pull lead wires or lift the body with lead wires. (Tensile force 50N or less)
Hold the body when handing. Otherwise it can result in damage of the Pressure switch causing failure or malfunction.
Follow the specified tightening torque

Excessive tightening torque can break the Pressure switch, bracket, and mounting screws. Insufficient tightening torque can displace the Pressure switch from the original position or loosen the mounting screws.
Eliminate any dust left in the piping by air blow before connecting the piping to the Pressure switch.
When using a sealing tape, leave a couple of threads exposed. Otherwise it can cause damage or malfunction.
Do not insert wires or other foreign matter into the pressure measurement port.
Connect terminal frame-ground (FG) to the ground when using a switch-mode power supply. Wiring Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching the lead wires.
Wiring with repetitive bending stress or tensile stress can cause breakage of the lead wires. Replace the product when damage to a lead wire is observed.
Wire correctly.
Incorrect wiring can break the Pressure switch depending on a miswired circuit.

Otherwise it can break the circuit inside the Pressure switch causing malfunction.
Do not route wires or cables together with power or high-voltage cable.

Otherwise the wires to the Pressure switch can be contaminated with noise or induced surge voltage from the power or high-voltage line causing malfunction. Lay the wires to the Pressure switch to a wire duct or in a protective tube other than those for the power or high-voltage cables.

Poor insulation (interference with other circuit, poor insulation between terminals, etc.) can introduce over voltage or current to the Pressure switch causing damage.
Keep wiring as short as possible to prevent contamination from noise and induced surge voltage.
Do not use a cable longer than 10 m. Consult with SMC for the use with a cable longer than 10 m. Connect 0 VDC wire (blue line) directly or as close as possible to 0 VDC terminal of the DC power supply.
Environment Do not use the Pressure switch in environment containing corrosive gas, chemicals, sea water, water or vapor, or in a place where there is a possibility of adhesion of those substances to the Pressure switch.
It can cause failure or malfunction.
Avoid exposure of the Pressure switch to direct sunlight.

Use sunshade if the Pressure switch is exposed to direct sunlight. Otherwise it can cause failure or malfunction.
Do not use in a place where water, oil or chemicals splashes.

Otherwise it can cause failure or malfunction.
Do not use the Pressure switch nearby a place where electric surges are generated.
Internal circuit elements of the Pressure switch can deteriorate or break when equipment generating a large surge (electromagnetic lifter, high frequency induction furnace, motor, etc.) is located near the Pressure switch. Provide surge preventives, and avoid interference.

Relays or solenoid values generate electric surge voltage. When using the Pressure switch to drive these loads directly, provide a surge absorber.
-6No.PS##-OMJ0004
The Pressure switch is not resistive to a lightning surge defined in CE marking. Take measures to protect against a lightning surge at the load side. Prevent foreign matter such as remnant of wires from entering the Pressure switch.
Follow the specified range of the fluid and ambient temperatures.

The fluid and ambient temperatures should be 0 to 50 C. When operating at a temperature below 5 C, breakage or malfunction can occur to the Pressure switch due to freezing of condensed water in the compressed air. Take preventive measures against freezing. Installation of an air dryer is recommended in order to remove condensed water contained in the measured fluid. Do not use the Pressure switch in a place where temperature suddenly changes even if it stays within the specified range.
Do not expose the Pressure switch to heat radiation from a heat source located nearby.
It can cause malfunction.
Adjustment and Operation Do not short-circuit the load.

The Pressure switch indicates the error status when a load is short-circuited. However, over current can damage the Pressure switch.
Do not press the set buttons with a sharp pointed object.

It can cause damage to the set buttons.
Warm up for 20 to 30 minutes for the detection of low pressure.

The indication drifts about 1% soon after the power is on.
Maintenance Before performing maintenance, make sure to turn off the power supply, stop supplied air, release the residual air in the piping into the atmosphere, and verify that the pneumatic system is open to the air.
Otherwise an unexpected operation of the system component can occur.
Perform maintenance and check regularly.

Otherwise an unexpected malfunction of the system component can occur due to a malfunction of the Pressure switch.
Perform proper functional checks and leak test after maintenance.

Stop operation when an abnormality is observed such that the Pressure switch does not work properly or there is a leakage of fluid. Otherwise an unexpected malfunction of the system component can occur.
Drain condensed water regularly.

The flow of condensed water to the secondary side can cause a malfunction of pneumatic equipment.
Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean the Pressure switch body.
It can damage the surface of the body and erase the indication on the body. Use a soft cloth to remove stains. For heavy stains, use a cloth soaked with diluted neutral detergent and fully squeezed, then wipe up the stains again with a dry cloth.
-7No.PS##-OMJ0004
Model Identification and how to order

ISE35- N - 25 - M
Electrical entry
N: Bottom R: Top
Option 2
Nil A B No option With option for mounting of 1 modular AR / AW series With option for mounting of ARM10/11 series 1
mounting screws are attached.
1: An adapter, O-ring, lock pin and two
Option 1
Nil L No option Lead wire with connector (2 m)
Output specification
25 65 NPN open collector output PNP open collector output
Unit specification
Nil M P With unit conversion function 2 Fixed SI unit Pressure unit: psi (Initial value) With unit conversion function 2
use of Pressure switch with the unit conversion function in Japan. A unit label is attached.
2: The new Measurement Law prohibits the
-8No.PS##-OMJ0004

ISE35-N-
ISE35-R-
Indication light (Green LED): Displays the operation condition of the Pressure switch. 3-digit LED: Displays the current status of pressure, setting mode and error code. Four display modes can be selected display always in red or green only, or switch from green to red, or red to green linking to output. button: Increases the mode and ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the peak display mode. button: Decreases the mode or ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the bottom display mode. button: Press this button to change to another mode and to set a set value.
-9No.PS##-OMJ0004

Terms 7 B C 7-segment indication Bottom value indication (mode) Chattering Chattering-preventing function D Digit (min. setting unit) E F F.S. (full span/full scale) Meaning When "8" is shown on the display. It is called 7-segment because 8 consists of 7 pieces of "- (segments)". Shows the minimum pressure reached at that moment. The phenomenon caused in the switch output type in which the output turns on and off repeatedly at high frequency. A function to delay the response time of switch output in order to prevent chattering. Shows how precisely the pressure can be indicated or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1kPa, e.g., 1,2,3,,99,100. Indicates a failure that may be causing the pressure to fail through a self-diagnosis function. Abbreviation for full span and full scale; means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. For example, when the output voltage is 1 to 5 [V], the F.S. will be 5-1 =4 [V]. (Reference: 1%F.S. = 4 x 0.01 = 0.04 [V]) Difference between the points at which the Pressure switch is turned on and off. Refer to "List of output modes" on page 21. Shows the deviation between displayed pressure value and the true pressure. The color of the digital display. There are four choices: usually green, usually red, green (off) to red (on), and red (off) to green (on). The light (LED: light emission diode) that turns on when the switch output is on. Turns the values in the display upside down. The unit of pressure used in the display. Prohibits a change in the setting of the Pressure switch (locks button operation). The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output line of the NPN output. The maximum current available to the output line of the switch output. The condition in which the pressure is being detected and indicated and switch operation is enabled. Refer to "digit". Refer to "List of output modes" on page 21. Refer to "List of output modes" on page 21. The switch that uses the NPN transistor for output. There are two choices, hysteresis mode and window comparator mode. There are two choices, normally open and normally closed.
Error indication
Indication accuracy Indication color Indication light Indication reverse mode Indication unit
K M
Key lock (function) Max. applied voltage Max. load current Measurement mode Min. setting unit
Normally closed Normally open NPN (open collector) (output)
Operating mode Output style
-10No.PS##-OMJ0004
Terms P Peak value indication (mode) PNP (open collector) (output) Power saving mode Pressure setting Proof pressure R Rated pressure range
Meaning Shows the maximum pressure reached at that moment. The switch that uses the PNP transistor for output. The condition in which the indicated value turns off and current consumption is reduced. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off. The pressure beyond which the Pressure switch breaks. The pressure range in which the Pressure switch satisfies the specifications. Values over this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot assured the specifications to be satisfied. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes at a temperature of 25 oC. The voltage at GND and output when the switch output is on. It depends on present load current and ideally should be "0". The elapsed time until the ON-OFF output begins working since the pressure supplied for the Pressure switch has reached the set value. A type of chattering. The pressure range in which the switch output can be set. Alternatively called "ON-OFF output". Function to change the unit in which the value of pressure is indicated. Only a product with this function can change the unit. A product with unit-changing function cannot be purchased if it is used within Japan. Pressure is indicated only by SI units in Japan. An output type that holds the output when the pressure is within a certain range. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 21.) Adjusts the displayed pressure value to "0".
Repeatability Residual voltage Response time Ripple S U Unit conversion function Set pressure range Switch output
W Z
Window comparator mode Zero clear (function)
-11No.PS##-OMJ0004

Wiring
Connection
Connections should only be made with the power supply turned off. Use separate routes for the Pressure switch wiring and any power or high voltage wiring. Otherwise, malfunction may result due to noise. Ensure that the FG terminal is connected to ground when using a commercially available switch-mode power supply. When a switch-mode power supply is connected to the product, switching noise will be superimposed and the product specification can no longer be met. This can be prevented by inserting a noise filter, such as a line noise filter and ferrite core, between the switch-mode power supply and the product, or by using a series power supply instead of a switch-mode power supply.
Connector
Connecting/Disconnecting When connecting the connector, insert it straight onto the pin holding the lever and connector body between fingers and lock the connector by pushing the lever claw into the concave in the body of switch. When disconnecting the connector, push down the lever by thumb to disengage the lever claw from the concave. Then pull the connector straight out.
Output specification
Use a separate route when installing wire. Malfunction stemming from noise may occur if wire is installed in the When the lead wire with connector provided by SMC is used, the colors of wire (Brown, Black, Blue) will apply as shown on circuit diagram. -25 NPN open collector output Max.30 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-65 PNP open collector output Max.80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-12No.PS##-OMJ0004
Pressure Setting
Operation When the pressure exceeds the set value, the switch will be turned ON. When the pressure falls below the set value by amount of hysteresis or more, the switch will be turned OFF. As a default setting, the Pressure switch is set to turn ON when the pressure exceeds 0.35 MPa, and turn OFF when it lowers 0.34 MPa. If the operation shown below does not cause any problem, keep this setting.
<How to perform> button in the measurement mode to display set values. 1. Press the
or button to change the set value. 2. Press the The button is for decrease. button is for increase and the Press the increased. button once to increase by one figure and press it continuously to keep set figure
Press the decreased.
button once to decrease by one figure and press it continuously to keep set figure
3. Press the
button to finish the setting.
For setting in window comparator mode, refer to "Pressure setting (in window comparator mode)" on page 18.
-13No.PS##-OMJ0004
Setting of Function
Default setting
As the time of shipment, the following settings are provided. If the setting is acceptable, keep it for use. If the different setting is necessary, change the setting with reference to each page.
Setting item Switch output Selects whether or not the Pressure switch output is made available. If the switch output is unnecessary, it is available just like a pressure gauge. Indication color Selects the color to indicate. Response time Sets of a response time prevents chattering in output. Operation mode Selects the mode to operate the Pressure switch. Hysteresis Output type Sets the method to generate the switch output. Power saving mode Selects the power saving mode. Secret code input Selects the necessity of secret code input for key lock.
The value in ( ) is for the indication unit "P".
Page See page 16
Default setting ON ON: Green OFF: Red 1s Hysteresis mode 0.01 MPa (1 psi) Normally open OFF OFF
See page 16 See page 17 See page 17 See page 19 See page 19 See page 20 See page 20
Setting of special function

Setting item Indication reverse mode Reverse the indication mode. When the indication unit shift function is equipped. Page See page 23 See page 24
NOTE
When the default setting is changed, since the different setting item appears in order depending on how button is pressed, confirm the item which needs to be set appears correctly and many times the prevent undesired setting.
-14No.PS##-OMJ0004
Measurement mode
The mode in which the pressure is detected and displayed, and the switch function is operating. This is the basic operating mode; other modes should be selected for set-point And other function setting changes.
-15No.PS##-OMJ0004
1. Switch output ( ) The necessity of switch output can be set. If no need of switch output is selected, the switch does not generate the output and functions just like a pressure gauge. In this case, only indication color changes correspondingly to the pressure setting change. The operation indication does not work. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. [ ] and current setting appears in turn.
2. Press the
or
button to select the necessity of switch output.
button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. 3. Keep pressing the Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns. 2. Indication color ( ) There are 4 indication types available.
Switch ON Red Green Red Green OFF Green Red Display Sor SoG rEd Grn
<How to perform> button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. 1. Keep pressing the After " " is indicated, press the button once. Then, [ ] and current setting appears in turn.
2. Press the
or
button to select an indication color.
button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. 3. Keep pressing the Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns.
-16No.PS##-OMJ0004
3. Response time ( ) The response time of the switch output can be set optionally. If the response time is changed, the indication updating interval correspondingly changes. If the changed response time causes the chattering in the switch output or indication, set the response time longer. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. ] is indicated, press the button twice. After [ ] and current setting appears in turn. Then, [
2. Press the
or
button to select the response time.
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns. 4. Operation mode ( ) The switch operation mode can be selected. For the operation in hysteresis mode and window comparator mode, refer to "List of output mode" on page 21. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. ] is indicated, press the button three times. After [ Then, [ ] and current setting appears in turn.
2. Press the
or
button to select the operation mode.
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns.
-17No.PS##-OMJ0004
Pressure setting (in window comparator mode)

<How to perform> 1. Press the button in the measurement mode to display set value.
or button to change the set value. 2. Press the The button is for increase and the button is for decrease. button once to increase by one figure and press it continuously to keep Press the set figure increased.
button once to decrease by one figure and press it continuously to keep Press the set figure decreased.
3. Pressing the
button, set value for the second setting item is displayed.
4. Press the 5. Press the
or
button to change the set value.
button to finish the setting.
-18No.PS##-OMJ0004
5. Hysteresis ( ) The hysteresis can be set. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. ] is indicated, press the button four times. After [ ] and current setting appears in turn. Then, [
2. Press the Press the increased.
or
button to select the hysteresis.
button once to increase by one figure and press it continuously to keep set figure
Press the decreased.
button once to decrease by one figure and press it continuously to keep set figure
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns. 6. Output type ( ) A desired output mode can be set freely for switch output. For the operation in normally open and normally closed, refer to "List of output mode" on page 21. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. After [ ] is indicated, press the button five times. Then, [ ] and current setting appears in turn.
2. Press the
or
button to select the output type.
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns.
-19No.PS##-OMJ0004
7. Power saving mode ( ) When the power saving mode is selected, the value goes off to reduce current consumption. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. ] is indicated, press the button six times. After [ ] and current setting appears in turn. Then, [
2. Press the
or
button to select the necessity of power saving mode.
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns. In the power saving mode, the key-in operation can return the normal display. Without key-in operation for 30 seconds the power saving mode returns again (only in the measurement mode). The display in power saving mode is as shown on right figure.
8. Secret code input ( ) The necessity of secret code input for key lock can be selected. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. ] is indicated, press the button seven times. After [ Then, [ ] and current setting appears in turn.
2. Press the
or
button to select the necessity of secret code.
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns. With secret code input, it becomes necessary to input the secret code to release key lock. The secret code can be saving mode is returned again. The secret code can be decided optionally by the operator. At the time of shipment, the secret code is set to "000". With secret code input, refer to page 26.
-20No.PS##-OMJ0004
List of output mode
If the point where the switch output is changed comes outside of set pressure range due to the change of set pressure, hysteresis(H) is automatically compensated.
-21No.PS##-OMJ0004
Indication mode ( ) The display can be reversed. This setting is necessary to change the indication mode on receipt of the Pressure switch. <How to perform> 1. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. After [ ] is indicated, press button eight times. Then, [ ] and current setting appears in turn.
2. Press the
or
button to select the indication mode.
3. Keep pressing the button for 2 seconds or longer after selection is completed. Then, the setting is finished, and the measurement mode returns. If reverse indication is selected, the button operation is changed as shown on right figure.
-22No.PS##-OMJ0004
Indication unit (
) (available with unit conversion function)
The indication unit can be selected freely.

Setting and display resolution MPa Kgf/cm bar psi
2
0.01 0.1 0.1 1
<How to perform> 1. Press the button three times in the measurement mode. ] and current setting appears in turn. [
2. Press the
or
button to select the indication unit
button to enter the setting. 3. Press the The measurement mode returns.
-23No.PS##-OMJ0004
Other Settings
Peak/Bottom hold value indication
The maximum (minimum) pressure from when the power is supplied to this moment is detected and updated. In the peak/bottom indication mode, the pressure is indicated. button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the maximum pressure As the peak indication, when the starts flashing and is held. To release holding the indication of the maximum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again. The measurement mode returns. As the bottom indication, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the minimum pressure starts flashing and is held. To release holding the indication of the minimum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again. The measurement mode returns. If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while the pressure is being held, the maximum (minimum) value is initialized.
Zero clear
A displayed value can be adjusted to zero when the pressure to be measured is within 10%F.S. of the pressure at the time of shipment from the factory. (The range of 1 digit setting is different depending on the individual product difference.) and buttons for 1 second or longer simultaneously, display is cleared as Press continuously the "0". The measurement mode returns automatically.
Key lock
A wrong operation performed unintentionally such as change of set value can be prevented. If the button operation is performed while key lock setting is being performed, [ ] is indicated for approx. 1 second. <How to perform -without secret code input-> button for 5 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. 1. Keep pressing the The current setting [ ] or [ ] is indicated. (Releasing key lock can be done in the same way.)
2. Press the
or
button to select locking or unlocking of the key.
3. Press the
button to enter the setting.
-24No.PS##-OMJ0004
<How to perform -with secret code input-> Locking button for 5 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. 1. Keep pressing the [ ] is indicated.
2. Press the
or
button to select locking of the key [
].
3. Press the
Unlocking 1. Keep pressing the [ ] is indicated.
button for 5 seconds or longer in the measurement mode.
2. Press the
or
button to select unlocking of the key [
].
3. When the button is pressed, the input of secret code is asked. For how to input the secret code, refer to "How to input and change the secret code" on page 26.
4. If inputted secret code is correct, the indication changes to [ ], and pressing , buttons releases key lock, and the measurement mode returns. and one of If inputted secret code is wrong, [ ] is indicated and the secret input mode returns. If the wrong secret code is inputted three times, [ ] is indicated and the measurement mode returns. If the secret code is forgotten, contact SMC.
-25No.PS##-OMJ0004
How to change the secret code At the time of shipment, the secret code is set to [000], but can be changed to optional one. <How to perform> 1. After the lock setting is finished (page 25), perform all three steps in the unlock setting procedure. (page 25, "3") 2. After the secret code is inputted and the indication changes to [ ], keep pressing the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or more. [000] is indicated and the change of secret code is asked. For how to input the secret code, refer to "How to input and change the secret code". Changed secret code is indicated. 3. After check it is as desired, press the button. The measurement mode returns. At this time, if the or code is not entered and the change of secret code is asked. button is pressed, changed secret
How to input and change the secret code

The first digit starts flashing. or button to set the value. Press the Pressing the button starts flashing the second digit. (If the button is pressed at the uppermost digit, the first digit starts flashing again.) After the setting is finished, keep pressing the button for 1 second or longer. If the operation is not performed for 30 seconds during input and change of the secret code, the measurement mode returns.
-26No.PS##-OMJ0004
Maintenance
How to reset the product for power cut or forcible de-energizing The setting of the product will be retained as it was before a power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that before a power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of the whole facility before operating the product. If the facility is under accurate control, wait until it has warmed up. (Approximate 20 to 30 minutes)
Mounting regulator
Cut the power supply to the Pressure switch when assembling. Also, turn the set pressure of the regulator to zero. Mount O-ring to the O-ring groove of the regulator. Attention should be taken not to damage the O-ring. Set the adapter with 2 set screws. Recommended tightening torque: Modular AR/AW series 0.60.05 Nm ARM10/11 series 0.320.03 Nm Mount the main body of the Pressure switch. Insert the lock pin to the adapter to the end firmly. Supply pressure slowly, and ensure no air leaks. The Pressure switch can be assembled with rotated 180 degree.
-27No.PS##-OMJ0004
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Applicable Pressure switch: ISE35
If a cause applicable to the failure cannot be identified and normal operation can be recovered by replacement with a new Pressure switch, this indicates that the Pressure switch itself was broken. The Pressure switch breakage can be caused by operating environment (network construction, etc.), and so consult with SMC separately to obtain countermeasures.
The pressure switch does not operate normally
The switch output is on
The indicator light is on
Refer to reference No. 1
The indicator light is off
The product is broken
Yes No
The switch output is off
The indicator light is on
The indicator light is off
The switch output generates chattering
The indicator light works improperly
An error signal comes on
Go to A
-28No.PS##-OMJ0004
The display is abnormal
The display fluctuates
Yes No
The display disappears Refer to reference No. 8
The display breaks off
The display flashes
The display is reversed
The indication accuracy does not satisfy the specifications
The unit cannot be changed
The buttons cannot be operated
The body has become loose
There is a noise
-29No.PS##-OMJ0004

Reference No. Problem Possible cause Investigation method 1. Check the set pressure. 2. Check the setting of the operation mode, hysteresis and output style. (Hysteresis mode/Window comparator mode, Normally open /Normally closed) Check the wiring of the output line. Confirm that the load is not connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Countermeasure
The output remains on. The indicator light remains on. The output remains on. The indicator light works normally.
Wrong pressure setting Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure
1. Set the pressure. 2. Set the function.
Replace the product. Correct the wiring. Replace the product. 1. Check the set pressure. 2. Check the setting of the operation mode, hysteresis and output style. (Hysteresis mode/Window comparator mode, Normally open /Normally closed) Check if it can be set so that the switch output can be used.
The output remains off. The indicator light remains off.
1. Perform the pressure setting. 2. Perform the functional setting.
Wrong setting (Selection of "without switch output") Product failure An unsuitable model selection Opened lead wire Product failure
Perform the functional setting.
Replace the product. Check if PNP is being used even though the NPN was selected, or vise versa. Check if there is bending stress being applied to any parts of the lead wire. (Bending radius and tensile force applied to the lead wire) Check the wiring. Confirm that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and that the output line has not become disconnected (contact failure). 1. Check if the hysteresis range is too narrow. 2. Check if the response time is too short. Review the selected model (output type). Modify the wiring conditions. (Adjust the tensile force and widen the bending radius.) Replace the product.
The output remains off. The indicator light works normally.
Incorrect wiring The switch output generates chattering. Wrong setting
Correct the wiring.
Perform the functional setting.
Product failure
Replace the product.
-30No.PS##-OMJ0004
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause
Investigation method 1. Check if a current of 80 mA or more is flowing to the output. 2. Check whether the connected load is as specified, and confirm that there is no short circuit in the load. 3. Check if a relay without a surge voltage suppressor is connected. 4. Check if the wiring is in the same route as (or bundled together with) the high-voltage line or power line. 1. Confirm that there is no possibility of noise interference, such as static electricity. 2. Confirm that the power supply voltage is in the range of 12 to 24 VDC10%. 1. Confirm that the pressure is not over the upper limit of the set pressure range. 2. Check if moisture such as water droplets has entered the inside of the piping. 1. Confirm that the pressure is not over the upper limit of the set pressure range. 2. Confirm if the moisture such as water drop has entered the inside of the piping. Check if the pressure difference is more than 10%F.S. from atmospheric pressure (0.11 MPa or more) when the zero clear operation is performed.
Countermeasure 1. 2. Connect the load as specified. 3. Change to a relay with a surge voltage suppressor or take measures to prevent noise. 4. Separate the wiring from the high voltage line and power line. 1. Remove the noise source or take measures to prevent noise interference and turn off the power supply. Then, turn the power supply on again. 2. Supply an operating voltage of 12 to 24 VDC10%. 1. Return the pressure to within the set pressure range. 2. Take measures to prevent moisture from entering the piping. 1. Return the pressure within the set pressure range. 2. Take the measure to prevent the moisture from entering to the piping.
Over current to the output (Er1)
An over current error (Er1) is displayed. A system error (Er4, 6, 7, 8) is displayed. 6 The display shows "HHH". The display shows "LLL". A residual pressure error (Er3) is displayed.
Improper transaction of the internal data of the Pressure switch (Er4, 6, 7, 8)
Applied pressure over the upper limit (HHH)
Applied pressure under the lower limit (LLL) The pressure is not atmospheric pressure for zero clear operation (Er3) Product failure Incorrect power supply
Return the applied pressure to atmospheric pressure and retry the zero clear operation.
Replace the product. Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check the wiring to the power supply. Confirm that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and that the output line has not come off (contact failure). Supply a power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
The values in the display fluctuate.
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Factory pressure change
Check if the factory pressure has changed.
If the fluctuation is worrisome, consider that a change in the response time correspondingly increases the interval for updating the display, and set the response time longer.
-31No.PS##-OMJ0004
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause Improper power supply
Investigation method Confirm that the power supply voltage is in the range of 12 to 24 VDC10%. Check if the power saving mode is selected. Check the wiring for the power supply. Confirm that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and that the output line has not come off (contact failure). Check if the peak indication mode or bottom indication mode has been selected. 1. Check the wiring to the power supply. 2. Check if bending stress is being applied to part of the lead wire.
Countermeasure Supply a power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC10%. Set functions.
The display turns off. A part of the display misses.
Power saving mode
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Product failure Peak/bottom indication mode
Replace the product. Release the peak/bottom indication mode. 1. Correct the wiring. 2. Modify the wiring (bending radius and stress).
The display is flashing.
Wiring failure
10
The display is inverted.
Selection of unsuitable model (Selection of wrong electrical entry) Change of indication mode
Check the part number for the electrical entry.
Review the selected model.
Check the selected indication mode.
Change the indication mode. Install a 5m filter to prevent the intrusion and attachment of the foreign matter. Also, exhaust the filter periodically to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the assembly process of the regulator. If the regulator is tightened at a torque over the specified range, its mounting screw could break. Also, remount the O-ring. The figures in the display and output drift when the power supply is turned on. If fine pressure needs to be detected, wait approximate 20 to 30 min. after turning on the power supply to allow it to warm up. Replace the product.
Intrusion of foreign matter
Check for the intrusion and attachment of foreign matter into the pressure port.
11
The indication accuracy of the pressure does not satisfy the specifications.
Air leakage
Check the air leakage from the mounted part. (Presence of the O-ring)
Insufficient warming-up
Confirm that the specified accuracy is satisfied 20 min. after the power supply is turned on.
Product failure
-32No.PS##-OMJ0004
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause An unsuitable model selection (Selection of model "without unit change function") Product failure
Investigation method
Countermeasure "M" in the part number means that the unit cannot be changed.
12
The unit cannot be changed.
Check for an "M" suffix on the part number on the name plate
: The new Measurement Law prohibits the use of Pressure switch with the unit conversion function in Japan. : Fixed SI unit: MPa
Replace the product. Check if the key lock mode is selected. 1. Confirm that the mounting adapter for the regulator is installed properly. 2. Confirm that the Pressure switch is installed to the mounting adapter properly. Release the key lock mode. Replace the product.
13
The buttons cannot be operated.
Key lock mode Product failure
14
The body has become loose.
Incorrect installation
Correct the mounting conditions.
Product failure
Replace the product. Rework the assembly of the regulator. If the regulator is tightened at a torque over the specified range, its mounting screw could break. Also, remount the O-ring. Replace the product. Check the wiring to the power supply. Confirm that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and that the output line has not come off (contact failure). Check if there is bending stress applied to a certain part of the lead wire. (Bending radius and tensile force applied to the lead wire.)
15
Noise.
Air leakage
Check for air leakage from the mounted part. (No mounted O-ring)
Product failure
Incorrect wiring The operation is unstable. Opened lead wire
Correct the wiring.
16
Modify the wiring conditions. (Adjust the tensile force and widen the bending radius.) Replace the product.
Product failure
-33No.PS##-OMJ0004

Error Name Over current Error Error Display Error Type A load current of switch output is 80 mA or more. During zero clear operation, pressure over 10%F.S. is applied. After 3 s, the mode will reset to the measurement mode. 1 digit of the zero clear range varies with individual product differences. Pressure has exceeded the upper limit of the set pressure range. Pressure has exceeded the lower limit of the set pressure range. Troubleshooting Method Turn the power off and remove the output factor for the over current. Then turn the power on.
Residual pressure Error
Perform zero clear operation again after restoring the applied pressure to an atmospheric pressure condition.
Pressurizing Error
Reset applied pressure to a level within the set pressure range.
System Error
Displayed in the case of an internal data error.
Turn the power off and turn it on again. If resetting fails, an investigation by SMC Corporation will be required.
-34No.PS##-OMJ0004
Specification
Specifications
Model No. Rated pressure range Set pressure range Proof pressure Setting and display resolution Applicable fluids Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Chattering-proof function Short circuit protection Repeatability Hysteresis Display method Indication accuracy Indicator light Environment Enclosure Ambient temperature Hysteresis mode Window comparator mode ISE35 0 to 1 MPa -0.1 to 1 MPa 1.5 MPa 0.01 MPa Air, inert gases, and incombustible gases 12 to 24 VDC, ripple (p-p) 10% or less (Protected against inverse connection) 55 mA or less (With no load) NPN or PNP open collector output 80 mA 30 V (During NPN output) 1 V or less (80 mA load current) 1 s (0.25, 0.5 ,2 ,3 selectable) Provided 1%F.S. Variable (from 0) 3-digits 7-segment display, dual-color display (Red/Green), A switch can be operated simultaneously. 2%F.S. 1 digit (253 C reference) OUT: LIT When ON (Green) IP40 -5 to 50 C (No freezing) Oil resistance vinyl cabtyre cable 3 cores 3.4, 2 m Sectional area of conductor: 0.2 mm2 (AWG25) Outside diameter of insulator: 1.12 mm CE, UL/CSA, RoHS
Lead wire with connector (for option "L") Standard
-35No.PS##-OMJ0004
Dimensions
-36No.PS##-OMJ0004
Revision history
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2007-2010 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved No.PS##-OMJ0004
No.PS##-OMN0007
PRODUCT NAME
Digital pressure switch for energy-saving control ejector

ZME-ZSE###-A
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model indication and How to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and Installation Installation Wiring Wiring Internal circuit and wiring example Easy Setting Measurement mode Function Setting Function selection mode Default setting F0 Unit selection function F1 OUT1 F2 OUT2 F3 Response time F4 Auto-preset F6 Fine adjustment of display value F11 Display resolution F80 Power saving mode F81 Security code F90 Setting of all functions F96 Check of suction command signal F97 Copy function F98 Check of output F99 Reset to the default setting Other Settings Maintenance Troubleshooting Error indication Specification Specifications 2 9 10 11 15 15 16 16 17 18 18 21 21 21 23 24 26 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 37 38 40 42 43 46 47 54 55 55
-1No.PS##-OMN0007
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International standards (ISO/IEC) 1) and other safety regulations.
1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power -- General rules relating to systems ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power -- General rules relating to systems IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery -- Electrical equipment of machines (Part 1: General requirements) ISO 10218-1992: Manipulating industrial robots -Safety. etc.
Warning
-2No.PS##-OMN0007
Caution


1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered. 2) Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
-3No.PS##-OMN0007
Operator
This operation manual has been written for those who have knowledge of machinery and apparatus that use pneumatic equipment and have full knowledge of assembly, operation and maintenance of such equipment. Please read this operation manual carefully and understand it before assembling, operating or providing maintenance to the product.
Safety Instructions
Warning
Do not use the product except for energy-saving control ejector

Fire, malfunction, or damage to the product or the system can result.



If using the product in an interlocking circuit. Provide a double interlocking system, for example a mechanical system Check the product regularly for proper operation
The following instructions must be followed during maintenance. Turn off the power supply Stop the air supply, exhaust the residual pressure and verify that the air is released before performing maintenance.
Verify the system sufficiently before judging the applicability when a permeable workpiece is to be sucked. Rapid decrease in vacuum pressure during suction of the workpiece may cause the ejector to fail to restart in time, causing injury or damage to the system because of the suction failure.
-4No.PS##-OMN0007
Caution
Perform sufficient trial run. Otherwise, injury or damage to the system can result due to suction failure depending on the conditions of the suction of the workpiece or the pressure switch settings. Perform sufficient verification before using this product. After maintenance is complete, perform appropriate functional inspections and leak test.
Stop operation if the equipment does not function properly or there is leakage of fluid. If there is leakage from parts other than the piping, the product might be broken. Cut off power supply and stop supplying fluid. Do not supply fluid if there is leakage. Safety cannot be assured in the case of unexpected malfunction.
NOTE
Product specifications Use the specified voltage.

Design the product to prevent reverse current when the circuit is opened or the product is forced to operate for
operational check. Reverse current can cause malfunction or damage to the product.
Input data to the Pressure switch is not deleted, even if the power supply is cut off. (Writing time: 1,000,000 times) For the details of compressed air quality, refer to ISO 8573-1, 1.1.2 to 1.6.2: 2001.



-5No.PS##-OMN0007
Product handling
If the tightening torque is exceeded the mounting screws and brackets may be broken. If the tightening torque is insufficient, the product can be displaced and loosen the mounting screws. (Refer to page 15)
Be sure to ground terminal FG when using a commercially available switch-mode power supply. Do not drop, hit or apply excessive shock (over 100 m/s2) to the Pressure switch.
Do not pull the lead wire forcefully, not lift the product by pulling the lead wire. (Tensile force 20 N or less)

If the entering of foreign material to the fluid is possible, install and pipe the filter or the mist separator to the inlet to avoid failure and malfunction.
-6No.PS##-OMN0007
Wiring Do not pull the lead wires.

Repetitive bending stress or tensile stress can cause the sheath of the wire to peel off, or breakage of the wire. If the lead wire can move, fix it near the body of the product. The recommended bend radius of the lead wire is 6 times the outside diameter of the sheath, or 33 times the outside diameter of the insulation material, whichever is larger. Replace the damaged lead wire with a new one.
Wire correctly.


Keep wiring as short as possible to prevent interference from electromagnetic noise and surge voltage.
Do not use a cable longer than 10 m. Wire the DC(-) line(blue) as close as possible to the power supply.
Environment Do not use the product in area that is exposed to corrosive gases, chemicals, sea water, water or steam.


This product is CE marked, it may happen that the set value of product is changed by the noise impressed in excess.

-7No.PS##-OMN0007



The fluid and ambient temperatures should be 5 to 50 oC. Operation under low temperature leads to cause damage or operation failure due to frozen moist in the fluid or air. Protection against freezing is necessary. Air dryer is recommended for elimination of drain and water. Avoid sudden temperature change even within specified temperature.




There will be a drift on the display of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on.

Incorrect setting can cause operation failure. For details of each setting, refer to page 21 to 45 of this manual.
The Pressure switch is compulsory turned off for 4 seconds after power supplied.
For 4 seconds after supplying power, the measurement output is turned off.


-8No.PS##-OMN0007
Model Indication and How to order
-9No.PS##-OMN0007
Output (OUT1) LED (green): LED is ON when the switch output (OUT1) is ON. Output (OUT2) LED (Red): LED is ON when the switch output (OUT2) is ON. LED display: Displays the current status of pressure, setting mode and error code. button (UP): Selects a mode and increases ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the peak display mode. button (DOWN): Selects a mode and decreases ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the bottom display mode. button (SET): Press this button to change to another mode and to set a value.
-10No.PS##-OMN0007

No. 7 7-segment indication A Terms Meaning Display type where each individual display character consists of up to 7 separate sections (called segments) (The figure 8 uses all 7 segments) Indicate the command signal which generate vacuum. (It is necessary to input the pressure switch) A function of the Pressure switch to automatically setup pressure just by having equipment hold and release a workpiece via vacuum adsorption. This function is used in an application where vacuum adsorption of a workpiece needs to be confirmed with a Pressure switch. Indicates the minimum vacuum pressure reached up to that moment. The problem of the switch output turning ON and OFF repeatedly around the set value at high frequency due to the effect of pulsation. A function to delay the response time of switch output in order to prevent chattering. A function to copy the set pressure values and function settings (excluding fine adjustment of display value) from one device to another. Shows how precisely the pressure can be indicated or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1 kPa, e.g., 1, 2, 3,, 99, 100. Indicate that the vacuum pressure during adsorption is monitored and ON and OFF of the ejector is automatically controlled. With the self-diagnosis function given to the Pressure switch, it indicates that there is a failure which could cause a switch failure. Refer to "Fine adjustment of display value". An indicated pressure value can be adjusted within the range of 5% R.D. (5% of the indicated value). It is used if a true pressure value is known or to correct the difference of an indicated value of the measurement equipment nearby that measures the same pressure as the Pressure switch. Abbreviation for full span and full scale; means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. A mode in which setting of functions is performed. It is a separate menu from the pressure setting. If any function settings needs to be changed from the factory default, each setting can be selected with F. The setting items are: display color, operation mode, output type, response time, display resolution, display value fine adjustment, use of auto preset, use of power saving mode, and use of PIN number. Refer to page 24 for a list of output modes that can be selected. Difference between the points at which the Pressure switch is turned on and off. Refer to "List of output modes" on page 24
Adsorption directive signal
Auto preset
B C
Bottom value display (mode) Chattering Chattering-preventing function Copy function
D Digit (Min. setting unit) E Energy saving automatic control Error indication (Error code) F Fine adjustment mode Fine adjustment of display value
F.S. (full span/full scale)
Function selection mode
-11No.PS##-OMN0007
No. I
Terms Indication accuracy Insulation resistance
Meaning Shows the deviation between displayed pressure value and the true pressure. Insulation resistance of the product. The resistance between the electrical circuit and the case. How fine the rated pressure range can be segmented. (Example: If a product for 0 to 1 MPa can indicate pressure by 0.001 MPa, the indication resolution is 1/1000.) The LED that turns on when the switch output is ON. The unit of pressure used in the display. Function that prevents changes to the settings of the Pressure switch (disables button operation). Manual pressure setup without using auto preset. This term is used to distinguish between manual and auto preset pressure setup. A Pressure switch which copies another Pressure switch's settings when using the copy function. The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output line of the NPN output. The maximum (minimum) load (resistance value and impedance) which can be connected to the output (output line) of the analog current output. The condition in which the pressure is being detected and indicated and switch operation is enabled. Refer to "digit". One of the switch output types. In hysteresis mode the switch output is turned ON when pressure equal to or greater than the switch output set value is detected. Refer to "List of output modes" on page 24) The switch that uses the NPN transistor for output. The operation principle of the switch output. Refer to "List of output modes" on page 24 for the operation status. Either hysteresis mode can be selected.
Indication resolution Indication LED Indication unit K M Manual set up Key lock function
Master pressure switch Max. applied voltage Max. (Min) load impedance Measurement mode Min. setting unit N Normal output
NPN (open collector) (output) O Output configuration Output mode
-12No.PS##-OMN0007
No. P
Terms Peak value display Pilot valve for air supply PNP (open collector) (output) Power saving mode Pressure setting Proof pressure
Meaning Displays the maximum vacuum pressure reached up to that moment. The solenoid valve which turns on and off the ejector. (This pressure switch outputs signal to the supply pilot valve) The switch that uses the PNP transistor for output. The condition in which the indicated value turns off and current consumption is reduced. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off. Pressure limit that if exceeded will result in mechanical and/or electrical damage to the product. The pressure range in which the Pressure switch satisfies the specifications. Values over this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot assured the specifications to be satisfied. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes at a temperature of 25 oC. The difference between the ideal ON voltage and the actual voltage when the switch output is on. It depends on present load current and ideally should be "0". See "Indication resolution". The time from when the pressure applied to the pressure switch reaches the set value, to when the ON-OFF output actually begins working. Generally, the shorter the response time, the better the performance. One of the switch output types. In hysteresis mode the switch output is turned ON when pressure less than or equal to the switch output set value is detected. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 24)
R Rated pressure range
Repeatability
Residual voltage Resolution Response time
Reversed output
-13No.PS##-OMN0007
No. S
Terms Setting of function Setting pressure range. Slave pressure switch Switch output
Meaning Refer to "Function selection mode". The pressure range within which switch output can be set. When using the copy function, the pressure switch that receives the settings copied from the master switch. Output type that only has 2 possible states, ON or OFF. Sometimes referred to as "ON-OFF output". Function to change the unit in which the value of pressure is indicated. Only a product with this function can change the unit. A product with unit-changing function cannot be purchased if it is used within Japan. Pressure is indicated only by SI units in Japan. A measure of the products resistance to a voltage applied between the electrical circuit and case. The product may be damaged if a voltage over this value is applied. (The withstand voltage is not the supply voltage used to power the product.) Adjusts the displayed pressure value to "0".
U Unit selection function
W Withstand voltage
Zero clear (function)
-14No.PS##-OMN0007

Installation
Mount the O-ring provided into the O-ring groove of the pressure switch, then put the pin into the pin insertion groove and mount the pressure switch to the ejector body with the two mounting screws supplied. (The required tightening torque is 0.07 to 0.10 Nm) If the tightening torque is exceeded, the mounting part can be deformed and broken.
-15No.PS##-OMN0007
Wiring
Wiring
Connection
Connector use for pressure switch

Connecting/Disconnecting When mounting the connector, insert it straight into the socket holding the lever and connector body, and push the connector until the lever hooks into the housing, and locks. When removing the connector, press down the lever to release the hook from housing and pull the connector straight out.
Connection of integrated cable assembly for the solenoid valve/pressure switch

See the drawing below and connect the in integrated cable Assy to the applicable vacuum ejector.
Power supply/output cable connector pin numbers (Pressure switch cable assembly)
-16No.PS##-OMN0007

NPN output type NPN open collector 2 outputs (Use one output for controlling the supply pilot valve) Max. applied voltage 26.4 V, Max. load current 80 mA Residual voltage 2 V or less. Separate electrical entries for the pilot valves and the digital pressure switch Integrated electrical entry for the pilot valves and the digital pressure switch
PNP output type PNP open collector 2 outputs (Use one output for controlling the supply pilot valve) Max. load current 80 mA Residual voltage 2 V or less. Separate electrical entries for the pilot valves and the digital pressure switch Integrated electrical entry for the pilot valves and the digital pressure switch
-17No.PS##-OMN0007
Easy Setting
Measurement mode
The measurement mode is the condition where the pressure is detected and indicated, and the switch function is operating. This is the basic mode, and other modes should be selected for setting changes and other function settings.
-18No.PS##-OMN0007
See below for the energy saving control operation and the set values which are preset to the switch. If the operation shown below is acceptable, then keep these settings. Function that enables the easy setting of the ON and OFF points of the switch output, and the operation of the supply pilot valve. Operation of OUT1 When the pressure exceeds the set value (P_1), the pressure switch will be turned ON. When the pressure falls below the set value (P_1) by the amount of hysteresis value (H_1), the switch will be turned OFF. The default settings are P_1: -70.0 kPa and H_1:10.0 kPa. Operation of OUT2 Supply pilot valve: OUT2 is turned on by the signal for suction. Suction starts by the generation of vacuum pressure. When the vacuum pressure reaches the set value (P_1), the supply pilot valve turns OFF. After the supply pilot valve is turned off, the vacuum pressure will decrease, when the vacuum pressure drops below (P_1) by the amount set in (P_2) the supply pilot valve will turn on again and increase the vacuum pressure. After that, supply pilot valve will turn ON and OFF repeatability. Default setting is H_2: 5.0 kPa.
<How to change the set value> Normal output (1) Press the button once in measurement mode. (Refer to page 18)
(2) P_1" and the set value are displayed in turn.
-19No.PS##-OMN0007
(3) Press the button to change the set value. or The button is to increase vacuum pressure and the Press the value.
button is to decrease.
button once to increase by one digit, and press it continuously to keep increasing the set
Press the value.
button once to decrease by one digit, press it continuously to keep decreasing the set
button to complete the setting of P_1. The display shows [H_1] and the set value in turn. (4) Press the The button is to increase and the button is to decrease the set value.
(5) Press the button to complete the setting of H_1. The display shows [H_2] and the set value in turn. The button is to increase and the button is to decrease the set value.
(6) Press the
button to complete the setting.
When the reversed output are changed, the following parameters are displayed, and each set value can be changed, using the method shown above. For details of how to change the reversed output, refer to the setting of each function. Reversed output
-20No.PS##-OMN0007
Function Setting
In measurement mode, press the button for 2 seconds or longer to display [F 0]. Select to display the function setting to be changed, [F ]. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer in function selection mode to return to measurement mode.
Default setting
The default settings are as follows [F 0] Unit selection function
Item SI unit fixed Unit conversion function
See page 23
Default setting kPa
[F 1] Setting of OUT1
Item Output mode Reversed output Pressure setting Hysteresis
See page 24
Description Default setting Hysteresis mode Normal output -70 kPa 10 kPa
Select the hysteresis mode. Selects which type of switch output is used, normal or reversed. Sets the ON or OFF point of the switch output. Set the hysteresis to prevent chattering.
See page 26 [F 2] Setting of OUT2 Same setting as [F 1] OUT1.

Item Reversed output Supply pilot valve at signal ON Supply pilot valve at signal OFF Description Selects which type of switch output is used, normal or reversed. Sets the ON point of the supply pilot valve signal Sets the OFF point of the supply pilot valve signal Default setting Normal output 5 kPa 0 kPa
Set the range in which Sets the range where the ON point of the supply pilot valve signal the supply pilot valve is not allowed to be input. input is prohibited
1 kPa
-21No.PS##-OMN0007
Item [F 3] Response time [F 4] Auto-preset [F 6] Fine adjustment of display value [F11] Display resolution [F80] Power saving mode [F81] Security code [F90] Setting of all functions [F96] Check of suction command condition [F97] Copy function [F98] Check of output [F99] Reset to the default setting
Page See page 28 See page 29 See page 31 See page 32 See page 33 See page 34 See page 35 See page 37 See page 38 See page 40 See page 42
Default setting 2.5 ms Manual 0 1000-split OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal OFF
-22No.PS##-OMN0007
[F 0] Unit selection function

Setting is only possible when using a product with the unit selection function. (kPa/MPa can still be selected if the product does not have the unit selection function.) <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 0]. Press the Selection of the display unit Press the or button to select the display unit. button. Move on to select the display unit.
Press the
button to set.
Return to function selection mode.
Setting of [F 0] Unit selection function completed. Display unit and minimum setting unit.
Unit MPa 0.001 kPa 0.1 kgf/cm 0.001
2
bar 0.001
psi 0.02
InHg 0.1
mmHg 1
-23No.PS##-OMN0007
The output mode of OUT1 can be set. Reversed output, pressure value and hysteresis can be set. List of output modes
-24No.PS##-OMN0007
<Operation> Press the
or
button in function selection mode to display [F 1]. Press the button. Move on to the check of output mode.
Check of output mode Check the set value same as the display shown to the right, then move on to next setting.
Press the Setting of reversed output Press the output. or
button to set.
Move on to setting of reversed output.
button to select reversed
Press the Setting of pressure Press the or button to adjust pressure setting.
button to set.
Move on to setting of pressure.
Press the Setting of hysteresis Press the or select hysteresis. button to
button to set.
Move on to setting of hysteresis.
Press the
button to set.
[F 1] Setting of OUT1 complete.
-25No.PS##-OMN0007
Set OUT2. Set reversed output, ON and OFF points of the supply pilot valve, and the range in which an input is not allowed. Operation of OUT2 Supply pilot valve: OUT2 is turned on by the signal for suction. Suction starts by the generation of vacuum pressure. When the vacuum pressure reaches the set value (P_1 H_3: OFF point of supply pilot valve signal), the supply pilot valve is turned off. After that, when the vacuum level decreases and reaches the suction switch ON point (P_1 + H_2: Supply pilot valve signal ON point), the supply pilot turns on again to maintain the vacuum. After the supply pilot valve is turned off, the vacuum pressure will decrease. When the vacuum pressure reaches the suction switch ON point (P_1 + H_2: ON point of supply pilot valve signal), the solenoid valve for supply will turn ON again and increase the vacuum pressure. Afterwards, The supply pilot valve repeats this ON and OFF cycle. Area in which setting of H_2 is prohibited can be set by the range in which H_4: supply pilot valve signal is prohibited to input. The default settings are P_1-70.0 kPa, H_1:10.0 kPa, H_2:5.0 kPa, H_3:0.0 kPa, H_4:1.0 kPa
-26No.PS##-OMN0007
<Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 2]. Press the button to set. Move on to setting of reversed output.
Check of reversed output Check the set value same as the display shown to the right, then move on to next setting. or If the display is not correct, press the button to change the display. Press the Press the or button to set. Move on to setting of pressure.
button to change the set points.
Setting ON point of the supply pilot valve
Press the
button to set.
Move on to the next parameter.
Setting OFF point of the supply pilot valve
Press the
button to set.
Move on to the next parameter.
Set the range in which ON point of the supply pilot valve input is prohibited
Press the
button to set.
[F 2] Setting of OUT2 complete.

1: Selected parameter become effective after pressing the 2: After setting is made valid by the longer. 3: OFF point (H_2) of the supply pilot valve is automatically corrected by setting the input prohibited range (H_4) of ON point of the supply pilot valve. button. button for 2 seconds or
button, it is possible to move to measurement mode by pressing the
-27No.PS##-OMN0007
[F 3] Response time
Select the response time of the switch output. Output chattering can be prevented by setting the response time. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 3]. Press the Setting of response time Press the or response time. button to select the button. Move on to setting of response time.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 3] Response time completed.
-28No.PS##-OMN0007
[F 4] Auto-preset function
This function calculates and sets the pressure values automatically based on the on-going operation. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 4]. Press the button. Move on to setting of auto-preset function.
Setting of auto-preset Press the or button to select auto-preset.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 4] Auto-preset completed. Press button in measurement mode to set pressure. (Refer to page 30) Then press button again to change the pressure while the display is flashing.
: ON/OFF point of the supply pilot valve and the set point of the input prohibited range of the supply pilot valve may be corrected by the auto-preset function.
-29No.PS##-OMN0007
Auto-preset When auto-preset is selected in function selection mode, the set value can be calculated and memorized from the measured pressure. Repeating the suction and release of a workpiece several times automatically optimizes the set value. 1, Selection of auto-preset OUT1 Press the button in measurement mode to display "AP1". 2, Preparation of equipment for OUT1 Prepare equipment for which the pressure of OUT1 is to be set. 3, Setting of auto-preset for OUT1 Press the button, the display will show A1L" and pressure measurement begins. Operate the equipment and change the pressure. When the a pressure change is detected, [A1H] will be displayed automatically, continue operating the equipment in the same manner for several cycles. 4, Completion of setting Press the button to set [P_1] and [H_1] (in reverse output mode [n_1] and [H_1] are set) and complete auto-preset mode. The pressure switch will then return to measurement mode. ([n_1] and [H_1] are set in reverse output mode.) The settings made in auto-preset mode are as follows. P_1 = A-(A-B)/4 H_1 = |(A-B)/2| To clear the stored auto-preset settings, press the longer. and A = Maximum pressure value B = Minimum pressure value buttons simultaneously for 1 second or
-30No.PS##-OMN0007
[F 6] Fine adjustment of display value

This function is used to manually perform fine adjustment of the displayed pressure. It is adjustable within the range 5% R.D. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 6]. Press the button. Move on to setting of fine adjustment of display value.
Setting of fine adjustment of display value Current pressure value is displayed. or button to adjust the display value. Press the
Press the To initialize the adjustment value, when [FSC] is and buttons displayed, press the simultaneously for more than 1 second.
button to set.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 6] Fine adjustment of display value completed.
-31No.PS##-OMN0007
[F11] Display resolution

This function is used to change the pressure display resolution. This can be used to prevent the digits from flickering on the display. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F11]. Press the Setting of display resolution Press the or button to select display resolution. button. Move on to setting of display resolution.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F11] Display resolution completed.
: It may not be possible to change the resolution depending on the unit of pressure selected..
The units that allow display resolution to be selected are MPa, kPa, kgf/cm2, psi and inHg. (The units kgf/cm2, bar, psi and inHg can only be set when using a product with unit conversion function.)
[F 0] Unit selection function on page 23.
-32No.PS##-OMN0007
[F80] Power saving mode

Power saving mode is selectable. When selected and no buttons are pressed for 30 seconds, the pressure switch will shift to power saving mode. The default setting is normal mode (power saving mode off). <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F80]. Press the Setting of power saving mode Press the or button to select power saving mode. button. Move on to setting of power saving mode.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F80] Power saving mode completed.
Power saving mode 1 remains enabled until turned off. In power saving mode 1, the brightness of the whole display is reduced. In power saving mode 2, when buttons are pressed the display is normal, but if no buttons are pressed for 30 seconds, it will revert to power saving mode. (Power saving is only enabled in measurement mode). In power saving mode 2, a decimal point flashes and moves across the display. (In saving mode 2, a decimal point flashes and modes across the display.)
-33No.PS##-OMN0007
[F81] Security code

A security code can be selected, which must be entered to unlock the keys when the keys are locked. In the default setting, entry of a security code number is not required. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F81]. Press the Setting of security code Press the or button to select security code. button. Move on to setting of security code.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F81] Security code complete. If the security code is used, it becomes necessary to enter the security code to release the key lock. The security code number can be set to a different value by an operator. The default setting is "000". Refer to page 45 or details of operation when the security code is used.
-34No.PS##-OMN0007
[F90] Setting of all functions

All functions can be set, one after the other. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F90]. Press the Setting of all functions Press the or button to select all functions. button. Move on to setting of all functions.
[[on] (used) selected. [oFF] (unused) selected. Press the to set. button After the change to [oFF] (unused), press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer. 1: Setting of each function.
[F90] Setting of all functions completed.
Measurement mode.
1: Setting of functions Every time the Set by using the button is pressed, the function steps in the order of "Order of function of setting" on page 36 or buttons.
For details of how to set each function, refer to the relevant setting of function section in this manual.
-35No.PS##-OMN0007
Order of function of setting

Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Selection of display unit Setting of output mode (OUT1) Setting of reversed output (OUT1) Setting of pressure (OUT1) Setting of hysteresis (OUT1) Setting of output mode (OUT2) Supply pilot valve signal ON point Supply pilot valve signal OFF point Setting of hysteresis (OUT2) Set the range in which the supply pilot valve input is prohibited Setting of response time Setting of display resolution Setting of auto-preset Setting of initialization of fine adjustment of display value Setting of power saving mode Setting of security code Function
: Return to measurement mode from any setting item by pressing the S button for 2 seconds or longer.
-36No.PS##-OMN0007
[F96] Check of suction command signal

<Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F96]. Press the button. Move on to the suction signal input check.
Check of the input of suction command signal status When suction signal is not input, oFF is displayed.
When suction signal is input, on is displayed.
Press the
button.
[F96] Check of suction command signal completed.
-37No.PS##-OMN0007
[F97] Copy function

The set values of pressure and all other functions (except for the corrected value of fine adjustment of display) can be copied. The copy function is available when output and unit specifications are the same. The set values can be copied to up to 10 switches simultaneously. <Connection> The power supply should be turned off before connecting the pressure switches. Connect the FUNC terminals of the master and slave switches together. The master switch is the switch from which the settings are copied. The slave switch (es) are the switch (es) that the settings are copied to.
<Operation> Turn on the power supply of the master switch only. Press the or button of the master switch in function selection mode to display [F97] Press the Selection of copy function Press the or button to select copy function. button. Move on to the selection of copy function.
Press the
button to set.
-38No.PS##-OMN0007
The copy ready status is held even if the power supply is turned off.
Power supply of the slave is turned on. Copying is started by pressing the button on the master pressure switch within 3 seconds after turning on the power supply to the slave pressure switch.
Master switch
Slave switch
Sending/ Receiving
Flashing
Flashing
(Red)
(Red)
Copy completed
Press the button.
Successive copying is possible. The copy ready status is maintained held even if the power supply is turned off. Press the Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer To complete the copy function,press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer. Setting of [F97] Copy function completed. button.
: If the copy to the slave switch is not completed, it is detected as a copying function sending/receiving error. Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to return to measurement mode. Then check the wiring of the switches and retry the copy function.
-39No.PS##-OMN0007
[F98] Check of output

Output from the switch can be confirmed. The output can be turned ON/OFF manually. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F98]. Press the Output check Press the or button to select output check. button. Move on to check of output.
If [n] (normal output) is selected, press the button to set. Return to function selection mode.
If [F] (forcibly output) is elected, press the button to set. OUT1 check of output Press the or button to select OUT1 check of output.
Press the
button to set.
-40No.PS##-OMN0007
OUT2 check of output Press the or button to select check of output2.
After returning to [n](normal output), press the button to complete the output check. Setting of [F98] Check of output completed.
Press the button for 2 seconds or longer. Measurement mode.
: Return to measurement mode from any point by pressing the
button for 2 seconds or longer.
-41No.PS##-OMN0007
[F99] Reset to the default setting

If the setting of the pressure switch becomes unknown, the default setting can be restored. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 99]. Press the Reset to the default setting Set the display [ON] by pressing the or button, then press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. button. Move on to reset to the default setting.
All settings are returned to the default values. Return to function selection mode.
[oFF] (unused) selected. Press the button to confirm selection. Return to the function selection mode.
Setting of [F99] Reset to the default setting completed
-42No.PS##-OMN0007
Other Settings
Peak/Bottom hold value display
The maximum (minimum) vacuum pressure from when the power was supplied to this moment is detected and updated. For peak display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the maximum vacuum pressure and "Hi" starts flashing, and is held. To release the display of the peak pressure value, press the button for 1 second or longer. For bottom display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the minimum vacuum pressure and "Lo" starts flashing and is held. To release the display of the bottom pressure value, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while the vacuum pressure is being held, the maximum (minimum) values are reset.
Zero clear
The displayed value can be adjusted to zero when the pressure to be measured is within +/-3.5%F.S. of the zero point set at the time of shipment from the factory. Perform zero-clear while pressure is not applied. The zero clear range varies by 1%F.S. due to variation between individual products. When the and buttons are pressed for 1 second or longer simultaneously, display is reset to zero. Measurement mode is returned to automatically.
Key-lock function
The key lock function is used to prevent errors occurring due to unintentional changes of the set values. If a button operation is performed while the key lock setting is ON, "LoC" is displayed for approximately 1 second. (When the button is pressed, the set pressure will be displayed following "LoC".) <Operation Without security code input> (1) Press and hold the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting "LoC" or "UnL" is displayed. (To release key-lock, repeat the above operation)
(2) Press either the
or
button to select between locking and unlocking the keys.
(3) Press the
-43No.PS##-OMN0007
<Operation -With security code-> Locking 1, Press and hold the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. [UnL] is displayed.
2, Press the
or
button to select locking of the keys [LoC].
3, Press the
Unlocking 1, Press and hold the [LoC] is displayed.
button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode.
2, Press the
or
button to select locking of the keys [UnL].
3, When the button is pressed, input of the security code will be requested. For how to enter the security code, refer to "How to entry the security code" on page 45.
4, If the security code entered is correct, the display changes to [UnL], and pressing any of the , or buttons releases the key lock and returns the device to measurement mode. If the security code entered is incorrect, [FAL] is displayed, following which the security code input screen returns. If the wrong security code is entered 3 times, [LoC] is displayed and the device returns to measurement mode.
-44No.PS##-OMN0007
How to change the security code At the time of shipment, the security code is set to [000], but this can be changed to any number. <Operation> 1, After the key lock setting has been completed, perform all three steps in the unlock setting procedure. (page 44, "3,"). 2, After the security code is entered and the indication changes to [UnL], Press and hold the buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. [000] is displayed and the new security code should be entered. For how to input the security code, refer to "How to input and change the security code". The new security code will be displayed. and
3, Check the new security code is as desired and press the button for 1 second or longer. Return to the measurement mode. At this time, if the or button is pressed, the security code is not changed and a new security code should be entered.
How to entry the security code The left most digit starts flashing. Press the or button to change the value. Press the button to make the next digit to the right flash. button is pressed when the last digit is flashing, the left (If the most digit starts flashing again). After the setting is complete, Press and hold the button for 1 second or longer. (If an operation is not performed for 30 seconds during input or change of the security code, it will return to measurement mode.)
-45No.PS##-OMN0007
Maintenance
How to reset the product for power cut or forcible de-energizing The setting of the product will be retained as it was before a power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that before a power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of the whole facility before operating the product. If the facility is under accurate control, wait until it has warmed up. (Approximately 10 to 15 minutes)
-46No.PS##-OMN0007
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Applicable Pressure switch: ZME-ZSE-A If an operational failure of the pressure switch occurs, please select the cause of failure from the flow chart below. If a cause applicable to the failure cannot be identified and normal operation can be recovered by replacement with a new pressure switch, this indicates that the pressure switch itself was faulty. The damage to the pressure switch may have been caused by the operating environment (network construction, etc.). Consult with SMC separately to obtain countermeasures.
The pressure switch does not operate correctly The indication LED is ON Refer to error No.1 Product failure Refer to error No.2
The switch output is ON
The indication LED is OFF
Yes No
The switch output is OFF The indication LED is ON
Product failure
The indication LED is OFF
Refer to error No.1 Refer to error No.3
The switch output is chattering
Refer to error No.4
Refer to error No.5
The indication LED operates incorrectly
Product failure
An error is displayed
Refer to error No.6
-47No.PS##-OMN0007
The display is not normal
Refer to reference No.7 Refer to reference No.8
Yes No
The display disappears
Refer to reference No.9
The display flashes
Pressure display difference when using 2 or more Pressure switches
The display accuracy does not satisfy the specifications
The units cannot be changed
The product is noisy
Copy function error
Not able to copy
The slave switch does not complete copying
-48No.PS##-OMN0007

Error No. Problem Output remains ON. Indication LED remains ON. Output remains OFF. Indication LED remains OFF. Output remains ON. Indication LED works correctly. Possible cause Investigation method Countermeasure
(1) Check the set pressure value. Incorrect pressure (2) Check the settings of the hysteresis and output type. setting (Normal output/reversed output) Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure Incorrect wiring Check the wiring of the output. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check if PNP is used even though NPN should have been selected, or the other way around. Check the wiring of the output. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-).
(1) Reset the pressure settings. (2) Reset the function settings. Replace the product. Correct the wiring. Replace the product. Correct the wiring.
Output remains OFF. Indication LED works correctly.
Unsuitable model selection
Review the selected model (output type).
Broken lead wire
Check if there is bending stress Correct the wiring. applied to any parts of the lead wire. (adjust the tensile force and (Bending radius and tensile force increase the bending radius). applied). Replace the product. Check the wiring. Check if the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the output wiring is loose (contact failure).
Product failure
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
The switch output generates chattering. Incorrect setting
(1) Check the pressure settings. (1) Reset the pressure (2) Check if the hysteresis range is settings. too narrow. (3) Check the setting of the response (2) Increase the hysteresis. (3) Change the response time. time setting. Check if the response time is too short. Replace the product.
Product failure
Adjust the set pressure Check the pressure settings. value. Slow switch output Incorrect pressure Check if the detected pressure and Ensure the set pressure the set pressure values are the same response. setting value is not too close to the or are too close. detected pressure value.
-49No.PS##-OMN0007
Error No.
Problem
Possible cause
Countermeasure
(1)(2) Connect the (1) Check if the output current is 80 appropriate load. mA or more. (3) Use a relay with a surge (2) Check if the specified load is voltage suppressor or connected. Over current to the take measures to (3) Check if a relay without a surge output (Er1 and 2) prevent noise. voltage suppressor is connected. (4) Separate the wiring from (4) Check if the wiring is in the same the high-voltage and/or route as (or bundled together with) a power line. high-voltage or power line. (1) Remove the noise and the noise source (or take An over current measures to prevent Incorrect internal (1) Check if there is noise interference error (Er1, 2) is noise interference), and (such as static electricity. data processing of displayed. reset the product (or turn the product (Er0, (2) Check if the power supply voltage off and then turn back on System error is in the range 24 VDC 10%. 4, 6, 7, 8 or 9) the power supply. (Er0, 4, 6, 7, 8 or (2) Supply power in the 9) is displayed. range 24 VDC 10%. HHH is displayed. (1) Reset applied pressure (1) Check that the pressure is not LLL is to a level within the set above the upper limit of the set Applied pressure displayed. pressure range. pressure range. is over the upper (2) Take measures to prevent Residual (2) Check that foreign matter has not limit (HHH). foreign matter from pressure error entered the piping. getting into the piping. (Er3) is displayed. (1) Bring the pressure back (1) Check that the pressure is not within the set pressure below the lower limit of the set Applied pressure range. pressure range. is under the lower (2) Take measures to prevent (2) Check that foreign matter has not limit (LLL). foreign matter from entered the piping. entering the piping. Pressure is not atmospheric pressure at zero-clear operation (Er3). Product failure Return the applied pressure to atmospheric pressure, and retry the zero clear operation. Replace the product.
Check that a pressure above 3.5%F.S. was not applied, during zero-clear operation.
-50No.PS##-OMN0007
Error No.
Problem
Countermeasure
Check if the power supply voltage is in Supply power supply the range 24 VDC 10%. voltage of 24 VDC 10%. Check the power supply wiring Check if the brown and blue wires are Correct the wiring and/or connected to DC(+) and DC(-) load resistance. respectively, and if the wiring is secure. If the fluctuation is not acceptable, the number of digits (display sensitivity) can be reduced by changing the display resolution.
Incorrect wiring 7 Displayed values fluctuates. Factory line pressure is not stable. Incorrect power supply The display turns OFF. 8 Part of the display is missing.
Check if the factory line pressure is changing.
Check if the power supply voltage is in Supply power supply the range 24 VDC 10%. voltage of 24 VDC 10%. Check the power supply wiring. Check if the brown and blue wires are Correct the wiring. connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the wiring is secure. Check if power saving mode is selected. Reset the setting of function. Replace the product. Turn off the peak value/bottom value display mode. (1) Correct the wiring. (2) Correct the wiring (bending radius and stress). Use the fine adjustment mode to adjust the display if the dispersion is within the display accuracy range. Replace the product.
Incorrect wiring
Power saving mode Product failure
Peak value/bottom Check if peak value or bottom value value display display mode is selected. mode is selected. 9 The display flashes. Wiring failure (1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if bending stress is being applied to a specific part of the lead wire.
10
Dispersion within Pressure display the display difference when accuracy range using 2 or more Pressure switches Product failure
Check if the dispersion is within the display accuracy range.
-51No.PS##-OMN0007
Error No.
Problem
Possible cause
Countermeasure Install a 5 m filter to prevent foreign matter from getting into the pressure port. Also, clean the filter regularly to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the piping. If the tightening torque is exceeded, the mounting screws, brackets and the pressure switch may be damaged. After energizing, the display and output can drift For precise pressure detection, allow the product to warm up for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product. "-M" in the part number means that the measurement unit cannot be changed. (kPa or MPa can be selected.)
: The unit selection function is not available in Japan due to a new measurement law. : It is fixed to the SI unit "kPa", "MPa".
Foreign matter
Check if any foreign matter has entered the pressure port.
11
The pressure display accuracy Air or liquid does not meet the leakage specifications.
Check if air or liquid are leaking from the piping.
Insufficient warm-up time
Product failure
12
The display units cannot be changed.
Improper model selection (Selection of model "without unit selection function")
Check if there is a "-M" at the end of the part number printed on the product.
Product failure 13 The buttons cannot be operated. Key-lock mode is activated. Product failure
Replace the product. Check if the key-lock function is turned Release the key-lock on. function. Replace the product. Rework the piping. If the tightening torque is exceeded, the mounting screws, brackets and the pressure switch may be damaged. Replace the product.
14
The product is noisy.
Air or liquid leakage
Check if air or liquid are leaking from the piping.
Product failure
-52No.PS##-OMN0007
Error No.
Problem Copy function error Not able to copy
Possible cause
Countermeasure
15
Incorrect wiring Product failure
(1) Check the wiring connection at the FUNC terminal. Correct the wiring. (2) Check the power supply wiring. Replace the product. (1) Correct the wiring (1) Check the wiring connection at the (2) The maximum transmitting distance of FUNC terminal. the copy function is 4 m. Check the power supply wiring. Shorten the lead wire to (2) Check the lead wire lengths. 4 m or less. Check the models The model number of the master and This function is only slave switches are different from each available if the pressure range, output and unit other. specifications are the same. Settings can be copied to a maximum of 10 slave Check the number of connected slave switches at one time. switches. Reduce the number of slave switches to 10 or less. Replace the product.
Incorrect wiring
16
Improper model The slave switch does not complete selected. copying. This function is only available if the pressure range, output and unit specifications are the same Product failure Effect of line pressure fluctuation because hysteresis is too narrow or response time is too short
(1) Check the set pressure values (hysteresis) (2) Check the response time.
(1) Widen the hysteresis. (2) Change the response time setting.
17
Operation is unstable (chattering).
Incorrect wiring/ broken lead wire
(1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire. (Bending radius and tensile force applied to the lead wire)
(1) Correct the wiring and/or load resistance (2) Correct the wiring. (Reduce the tensile force or increase the bending radius.) Replace the product.
Product failure
-53No.PS##-OMN0007
Error Indication
Error Name Error Display Error Type Troubleshooting Method
Over current Error
Turn the power off and remove the The switch output load current is more cause of the over current. than 80 mA. Then turn the power on. During the zero clear operation, pressure above 3.5%F.S. has been Perform zero clear operation again applied. After 1 second, the mode will return to after restoring the applied pressure to measurement mode. The zero clear an atmospheric pressure condition. range can vary 1%F.S. with individual product differences. Pressure has exceeded the upper limit of the set pressure range. Adjust the applied pressure to a level Pressure has exceeded the lower limit within the set pressure range. of the set pressure range.
Zero-clear Error
Pressurizing Error
System Error
-54No.PS##-OMN0007
Specification
Specifications
Rated pressure range Set pressure range Proof pressure Min. display unit Applicable fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch Output Maximum load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection Repeatability Hyster esis Display Indicator accuracy Indication LED Enclosure Environ Ambient temperature range ment Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Temperature characteristic cable Lead wire Standard
chattering will occur.
100.0 to -100.0 kPa 105.0 to -105.0 kPa 500 kPa 0.1 kPa Air, inert gas and non-flammable gas 24 VDC 10%, ripple max. 10%pk-pk (with polarity protection ) 40 mA or less NPN or PNP open collector OUT1: General-purposeOUT2: Valve control 80 mA DC26.4 V Max. 2 V (at 80 mA load current) 2.5 ms or less (response times available for anti-chattering function: : 20, 100, 500, 1000 or 2000 ms) Provided 0.2%F.S.1 digit Adjustable (can be set from 0) 1 3 1/2 digits, 7-segment display, colour display (Red) +/-2%F.S., +/-1 digit (at ambient temperature 25+/-3 oC) Light when ON OUT1: Green OUT2: Red IP40 5 to 50 oC 1000 VAC for 1 minute between live parts and case insulation resistance 50 M or more at 500 VDC Between lead block and case
o
Hysteresis mode
2%F.S. (25 C reference) 5 cores 3.5, 2 m Sectional area of conductor: 0.15 mm2 (AWG26) Outside diameter of insulator: 1.0 mm CE marking, RoHS
1: If the applied pressure fluctuates around the set value, the hysteresis must be set to a value more than the amount of fluctuation or
-55No.PS##-OMN0007
Revision history
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2011 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved
No.PS##-OMN0007
No.PS##-OMM0007-A
PRODUCT NAME

ZSE40A(F) ISE40A
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model Indication and how to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and Installation Installation Piping Wiring Pressure Setting Measurement mode Setting of Function Function selection mode Default setting F0 Unit conversion function F1 Setting of OUT1 F2 Setting of OUT2 F3 Setting of response time F4 Setting of auto-preset F5 Setting of analog output/auto-shift input F6 Setting of fine adjustment of display value F11 Setting of display resolution F80 Setting of power saving mode F81 Setting of security code Special function setting F90 Setting of all functions F97 Selection of copy function F98 Check of output F99 Reset to the default setting Other Settings Maintenance If the security code is forgotten Troubleshooting Specification Specifications Dimensions 2 8 10 11 14 14 15 18 20 20 22 22 22 24 25 28 30 31 33 35 36 37 38 39 39 41 43 45 46 49 50 51 59 59 61
-1No.PS##-OMM0007-A
Safety Instructions
Warning
-2No.PS##-OMM0007-A
Caution


-3No.PS##-OMM0007-A
Operator
Safety Instructions
Warning



Caution
-4No.PS##-OMM0007-A
NOTE
Product specifications The direct current power supply to combine should be UL approved as follows.
The Pressure switch is a Use the specified voltage.
approved product only if it has a
mark on the body.



Otherwise it can cause damage to the Pressure switch or inability to measure correctly.

Product handling
Do not apply excessive stress to the product when it is mounted with a panel mount.
Otherwise damage to the product and disconnection from the panel mount can result.
Be sure to ground terminal FG when using a commercially available switch-mode power supply. Do not drop, hit or apply shock to the Pressure switch.
-5No.PS##-OMM0007-A
Do not pull the lead wire forcefully, not lift the product by pulling the lead wire. (Tensile force 49N or less)

Wire correctly.


When analog output is used, install a noise filter (line noise filter, ferrite element, etc.) between the switch-mode power supply and this product. Environment Do not use the product in an environment that is constantly exposed to the splash of water.
Otherwise failure or malfunction can result. Take measures such as using a cover.
Do not use the product in an environment where corrosive gases or fluids could be splashed.
Otherwise damage to the product and malfunction can result.

-6No.PS##-OMM0007-A

The product is CE marked, but not immune to lightning strikes. Take measures against lightning strikes in the system. This product is CE marked, it may happen that the set value of product is changed by the noise impressed in
excess.




The fluid and ambient temperatures should be 5 to 50C. Operation under low temperature (5C or less) leads to cause damage or operation failure due to frozen moist in the fluid or air. Protection against freezing is necessary. Air dryer is recommended for elimination of drain and water. Avoid sudden temperature change even within specified temperature.




There will be a drift on the display and the analog output of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on. There will be a drift on the display of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on.




-7No.PS##-OMM0007-A
Model Indication and how to order
-8No.PS##-OMM0007-A
Piping specifications/Matrix table for option 1 and part number

Option 1 Description Bracket A Bracket B Bracket D Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Symbol A B D E F Part number ZS-24-A ZS-24-B ZS-24-D ZS-35-C ZS-35-D ZS-35-F ZS-35-G 01 N01 Pipng specification W1 WF1 M5 C4 C6
Option/Part number
Part number ZS-24-A ZS-24-B ZS-24-D ZS-35-C ZS-35-D ZS-35-F ZS-35-G Option Bracket A With 2 mounting screws each of M3 x 5L, M4 x 5L Bracket B With 2 mounting screws M4 x 5L Bracket D With 2 mounting screws each of M3 x 5L, M4 x 5L Panel mount adapter (Piping specification: 01, N01) Panel mount adapter (Piping specification: W1, WF1, M5, C4, C6) Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover (Piping specification: 01, N01) Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover (Piping specification: W1, WF1, M5, C4, C6)
-9No.PS##-OMM0007-A

Indication light (Orange LED): Displays the switch operation condition. LCD display: Displays the current status of pressure, setting mode and error code. Four display modes can be selected to display always in red or green only, or changing from green to red, red to green according to the output status. button(UP): Selects the mode or increases ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the peak display mode. button(DOWN): Selects the mode or decreases ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the bottom display mode. button(SET): Press this button to change to either mode and to set a set value.
-10No.PS##-OMM0007-A

Terms 2 7 A 2-color indication 7-segment indication (Analog) current output Analog output (function) (Analog) voltage output Meaning There are two colors to indicate a value, changing in accordance with ON and OFF of the switch output. When "8" is shown on the display. It is called 7-segment because 8 consists of 7 pieces of "- (segments)". See "Analog output (function)". Function to output the voltage or current in proportion to the pressure. See "Analog output (function)". A function of the Pressure switch to automatically setup pressure just by having equipment hold and release a workpiece via vacuum adsorption. This function is used in an application where vacuum adsorption of a workpiece needs to be confirmed with a Pressure switch. A function to correct the set value of the switch output in accordance with the applied pressure in case the switch operation is unstable due to pulsation of applied pressure. This function is used in applications such as vacuum adsorption. The pressure when a signal is externally input is set as a reference value with which the pressure that turns the switch on or off can be shifted. Shows the minimum pressure reached at that moment. The phenomenon caused in the switch output type in which the output turns on and off repeatedly at high frequency. A function to delay the response time of switch output in order to prevent chattering. A function to copy a pressure setting value and function setting (excluding fine adjustment of indication value). Shows how precisely the pressure can be indicated or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1 kPa, e.g., 1, 2, 3, , 99, 100. With the self-diagnosis function given to the Pressure switch, it indicates that there is a failure which could cause a switch failure. See "Fine adjustment of indicated value". An indicated pressure value can be adjusted within the range of 5% R.D. (5% of the indicated value). It is used if a true pressure value is known or to correct the difference of an indicated value of the measurement equipment nearby that measures the same pressure as the Pressure switch. Abbreviation for full span and full scale; means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. For example, when the output voltage is 1 to 5[V], the F.S. will be 5-1 = 4[V]. (Reference: 1%F.S. = 4 0.01 = 0.04[V]) It is a mode with which each function is set up, and it is a separate menu from the pressure setup. If the setting needs to be changed at factory, "F", each item can be set up. The items to be set up are: indication color, operation mode, output type, response time, indication resolution, fine adjustment of indicated value, use of auto preset, use of power-saving mode, and use of PIN number. Difference between the points at which the Pressure switch is turned on and off. Refer to "List of output mode" on page 27. Shows the deviation between displayed pressure value and the true pressure.
Auto preset
Auto shift
B C
Bottom value indication (mode) Chattering Chattering-preventing function Copy function
D Digit (Min. setting unit) E F
Error indication Fine adjustment mode Fine adjustment of indicated value
H I
Hysteresis Hysteresis mode Indication accuracy
Terms I Indication color Insulation resistance
Meaning The color of the digital display. There are four choices: usually green, usually red, green (off) to red (on), and red (off) to green (on). Insulation resistance of a product itself. The resistance between an electric circuit and a body. How fine the rated pressure range can be segmented. (Example: If a product for 0 to 1 MPa can indicate pressure by 0.001 MPa, the indication resolution is 1/1000.) The light that turns on when the switch output is on. The unit of pressure used in the display. Prohibits a change in the setting of the Pressure switch (locks button operation). See "Max. load impedance". Manual pressure setup without using auto preset. This term is used to discriminate from the pressure setup using auto preset. A Pressure switch which copies another Pressure switch's settings when using the copy function. The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output line of the NPN output. The maximum current available to the output (output line) of the switch output. The maximum (minimum) load (resistance value and impedance) which can be connected to the output (output line) of the analog current output. The condition in which the pressure is being detected and indicated and switch operation is enabled. Refer to "digit". One of the switch output types, and means the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure equal to the switch output set value or more is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it indicates the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure in the switch output range (n1L to n1H or n2L to n2H) is detected. (Refer to "List of output mode" on page 27.) The switch that uses the NPN transistor for output. There are two choices, hysteresis mode and window comparator mode. The resistance value of a component between the voltage outputting element and the output line at the output of the analog voltage output. It is indicated as a resistance value which is converted in accordance with the condition in which resistance is directly connected to the voltage output element. There may be an error in the output voltage depending on this output impedance and the input impedance of customers' equipment. (Example: If the Pressure switch with output impedance of 1k is connected to the A/D converter to detect the analog output of 5V, the detected voltage by the A/D converter becomes 5(V) 1(M)/(1(k) + 1(M)) 4.995(V), and there is an error of approximate 0.005 V.) The operation theory of the switch output. Either normal output or reversed output can be selected. Refer to "List of output mode" on page 27 for the operation status. Shows the maximum pressure reached at that moment. The size of the port on the switch body with which a device and the switch are connected.
Indication resolution Indication light Indication unit K L M Key lock (function) Load impedance Manual setup Master Pressure switch Max. applied voltage Max. load current Max. (Min.) load impedance Measurement mode Min. setting unit N Normal output
NPN (open collector) (output) O Operating mode
Output impedance
Output style P Peak value indication (mode) Piping-port size
Terms P PNP (open collector) (output) Power saving mode Pressure-sensing part Pressure setting Proof pressure R Rated pressure range
Meaning The switch that uses the PNP transistor for output. The condition in which the indicated value turns off and current consumption is reduced. A pressure-detecting part of a pressure-detecting element. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off. The pressure beyond which the Pressure switch breaks. The pressure range in which the Pressure switch satisfies the specifications. Values over this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot assured the specifications to be satisfied. The value currently displayed. For example, when the displayed value is 1.000, 5%R.D. will be 0.05, which is 5% of 1.000, while for a displayed value of 0.800 it will be 0.04. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes at a temperature of 25 oC. The difference between the ideal ON voltage and the actual voltage when the switch output is on. It depends on present load current and ideally should be "0". See "Indication resolution". The elapsed time until the ON-OFF output begins working since the pressure supplied for the Pressure switch has reached the set value. Generally, the shorter response time is, the better the performance is. One of the switch output types, and means the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure equal to the switch output set value or less is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it indicates the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure outside the switch output range (n1L to n1H or n2L to n2H) is detected. (Refer to "List of output mode" on page 27.) A type of chattering. See "Function selection mode". The pressure range within which switch output can be set. A Pressure switch whose settings are copied when using the copy function. Alternatively called "ON-OFF output". Function to change the unit in which the value of pressure is indicated. Only a product with this function can change the unit. A product with unit-changing function cannot be purchased if it is used within Japan. Pressure is indicated only by SI units in Japan. That part of the Pressure switch which is in contact with detected fluid such as a pressure sensor, seal, and fitting. An output type that holds the output when the pressure is within a certain range. (Refer to "List of output mode" on page 27.) Durability to voltage applied between an electric circuit and a body. A product's durability in withstanding voltage. If more voltage is applied to the product, the product may be broken. (Voltage mentioned here is not power voltage to activate the product.) Adjusts the displayed pressure value to "0".
R.D.
Repeatability
Residual voltage Resolution Response time
Reversed output
Ripple S Setting of function Setting pressure range Slave Pressure switch Switch output U Unit conversion function
Wetted part (or part exposed to gas) Window comparator mode
Withstand voltage
Zero clear (function)

Installation
Mounting
Mount the optional bracket and panel mount adapter to the Pressure switch. When the Pressure switch is to be mounted in a place where water and dust splashes occur, insert a tube (O.D 4, I.D 2.5) into the air-relieving port of the Pressure switch. (Refer to Tube attachmenton page 17.)
Mounting with bracket

Fix the bracket to the Pressure switch with the set screws M35 L (2 pcs.) or M45 L (2 pcs.) supplied. Apply a tightening torque of 0.5 to 0.7 Nm for the M3 set screws or 1.4 to 1.6 Nm for the M4 set screws. Bracket A or D (Model: ZS-24-A/ZS-24-D)
[01/N01 type] [W1/WF1 type]
Bracket B (Model: ZS-24-B)
Mounting with panel mount adapter

Panel mount adapter (Model: ZS-35-C/ZS-35-D) Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover (Model: ZS-35-F/ZS-35-G)
Piping
Connection using screw type piping
Connect suitable piping to the mating port. Hold the hexagon part of the pressure port and fix. Apply a tightening torque of 7 to 9 Nm. When using an M5 female fitting confirm the fitting specification.
Connection using One-touch fitting

1. Cut the tube perpendicularly. 2. Hold the tube and insert it into the One-touch fitting slowly until it bottoms out.
Warning
Do not use the Pressure switch in a place where electrical static charge will be problem.
It can cause the error and breakage of the system. Keep a margin for tube length to prevent twist, tensile and moment load from applying to the fitting and tube. When using a tube manufactured by another company, check its outside diameter accuracy satisfies the following value. 1) Nylon tube: 0.1 mm at maximum 2) Soft nylon tube: 0.1 mm at maximum 3) Polyurethane tube: +0.15 mm/-2 mm at maximum
Tube attachment
When this Pressure switch is used in a place where water and dust splashes may occur, insert a tube in the air-relieving port, and bring piping of the opposite side up to the safe position to keep it from water and dust. (See the figure below.)
: The tube should be inserted to the end of the air-relieving port. : SMC TU0425 (polyurethane, O.D 4, I.D 2.5) is a suitable tubing.
Wiring
Internal circuit and wiring example Z/ISE40A(F)Output specification
-S/-R
(Analog output mode) Switch output NPN open collector output type-2 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less R: Analog output 1 to 5 V Output impedance 1 k S: Analog output 4 to 20 mA Max. load impedance Power supply voltage 12 V: 300 Power supply voltage 24 V: 600 Min. load impedance 50
-S/-R
(Auto-shift input mode) With auto-shift switch output NPN open collector output type-2 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-X
(Copy function switch output) NPN open collector output type-2 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-V/-T
(Analog output mode) Switch output PNP open collector output type-2 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less T: Analog output 1 to 5 V Output impedance 1 k V: Analog output 4 to 20 mA Max. load impedance Power supply voltage 12 V: 300 Power supply voltage 24 V: 600 Min. load impedance 50
-V/-T
(Auto-shift input mode) With auto-shift switch output PNP open collector output type-2 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-Y
(Copy function switch output) PNP open collector output type-2 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
Pressure Setting
Measurement mode
The measurement mode is the condition where the pressure is detected and indicated, and the switch function is operating. This is the basic mode, and other modes should be selected for setting change and other function setting changes.
Set ON and OFF point of the Pressure switch. Operation When the pressure exceeds a set value, the Pressure switch will be turned ON. When the pressure falls below the set value by the amount of hysteresis or more, the Pressure switch will be turned OFF. The default setting of the output set value is the center value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. If the operation shown below does not cause any problem, keep this operation setting.
<How to operate> [Hysteresis mode] 1, Press the button once in measurement mode.
2, [P_1] or [n_1] and set value are displayed in turn.
3, Press the or button to change the set value. The button is for increase and the button is for decrease. Press the set figure. button once to increase by one figure, and press it continuously to keep increasing the
Press the set figure.
button once to decrease by one figure, and press it continuously to keep decreading the
4, Press the button to finish the setting of OUT1. [P_2] or [n_2] is displayed. Set OUT2 same as OUT1. The Pressure switch turns on within a set pressure range (from P1L to P1H) during window comparator mode. Set P1L (switch lower limit) and P1H (switch upper limit) with the setting procedure above. When reversed output is selected, [n1L] and [n1H] are displayed. Zero clear of indication Indication is reset to zero when and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second. For the first operation, perform zero clear without pressure supply.
Setting of Function
In measurement mode, press the button for 2 seconds or longer to display [F 0]. Show the display of function setting to be changed, [F ]. button for 2 seconds or longer in function selection mode to return to measurement mode. Press the
: Some functions are not available depending on part number. If a function is not available for specified type, the function is displayed
as [---].
Default setting
At the time of shipment, the follwing settings are provided. If the setting is acceptable, keep it for use. To change setting, enter function selection mode. [F 0] Unit conversion function
Unit specification Nil or M P ISE40A ZSE40A(F) ISE40A ZSE40A(F)
See page 24
Default setting MPa kPa psi
Pressure range
[F 1] Parameter setting of OUT1

Item Output mode Reversed output Pressure setting
See page 25
Explanation Default setting Hysteresis mode Normal output ISE40A: 0.500 MPa ZSE40A: -50.7 kPa ZSE40AF: 50.0 kPa ISE40A: 0.050 MPa ZSE40A: 5.1 kPa ZSE40AF: 5.0 kPa ON: Green OFF: Red
Selects hysteresis mode, window comparator mode or OFF mode. Selects reversed output. Sets ON or OFF point of the switch output
Hysteresis
Chattering can be prevented by setting hysteresis.
Display color
Selects the display color.
See page 28 [F 2] Parameter setting of OUT2 Same setting as [F 1] OUT1. At the output mode, Error detection mode can be selected. Display color is linked to the setting of OUT1, and can not be selected.
Other parameter setting

Item [F 3] Setting of response time [F 4] Setting of auto-preset [F 5] Setting of analog output/auto-shift input [F 6] Setting of fine adjustment of display value [F11] Setting of display resolution [F80] Setting of power saving mode [F81] Setting of security code [F90] Setting of all functions [F97] Selection of copy function [F98] Check of output [F99] Reset to the default setting Page See page 30 See page 31 See page 33 See page 35 See page 36 See page 37 See page 38 See page 39 See page 41 See page 43 See page 45 Default setting 2.5 ms Manual Analog output 0% 1000-split OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal OFF
[F 0] Unit conversion function

This function is available for unit selectable type. The unit that can be displayed is different depending on the pressure range. (Display in kPa/MPa is available even if unit conversion function is not equipped.) <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 0]. Press the button. Move on to select indication unit.
Select Indication Unit Press the unit. or button to select the indication
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 0] unit conversion function completed
Indication unit and minimum. setting unit

Unit MPa kPa kgf/cm bar psi InHg mmHg
2
ZSE40AF 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.02 0.1 1
ZSE40A 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1
ISE40A 0.001 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 -
Set output method of OUT1. Output turns on when the pressure exceeds the set value. The default setting of output set value is a center value of between atmospheric pressure and upper limit of the rated range. Display color depends on OUT1 condition. The default setting of display color is as follows, green lights up when output is turned on and red lights up when output is turned off. For the operation of each setting item, refer to "List of output mode" on page 27. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 1]. Press the button. Move on to setting of output mode.
Setting of output mode Press the or button to select output mode.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of reversed output Press the or button to select reversed output.
[oFF] (unused) selected. Press the to set. Press the button to set. Move on to setting of pressure. button
Move on to setting of display color.
Setting of pressure Set pressure based on setting procedure on page 21. "P" changes to "n" while reverse output is selected. ([P_1] [n_1]) Hysteresis mode: [P_1] Window comparator mode: [P1L][P1H] Press the button to set. Move on to setting of hysteresis.
Setting of hysteresis Press the or button to select hysteresis.
Press the
button to set.
Move on to setting of display color.
Setting of display color Press the or button to select display color.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 1] operation of OUT1 completed
1: Selected parameter become effective after pressing the 2: After having setting effective by the seconds or longer. 3: Select OFF mode if OUT1 is selected OFF.
button. button for 2
List of output mode
If the point where the switch output is changed is out of the set pressure range due to selection between normal and reversed output, hysteresis is automatically compensated.
: The above figure shows the operation at OUT1. For the operation at OUT2, all "1" shown in the above figure is changed to "2". (Ex) P_1 P_2
Set output method of OUT2. Displaycolor depends on OUT1, and is not set with this function. Output turns on when the pressure exceeds the set value. The default setting of output set value is a center value of between atmospheric pressure and upper limit of the rated pressure range. For the operation of each setting item, refer to "List of output mode" on page 27. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 2]. Press the button. Move on to setting of output mode.
Setting of output mode Press the or button to select output mode.
Press the
button to set.
Move on to setting of reversed output. [oFF] (unused) selected. Press the set. button to
Setting of reversed output Press the or button to select reversed output.
Output mode [Err] selected. Press the button to set. Move on to setting of pressure. Press the to set. button
Return to function selection mode. 3
Setting of pressure Set pressure based on setting procedure on page 21. "P" changes to "n" while reverse output is selected. ([P_2] [n_2]) Hysteresis mode: [P_2] Window comparator mode: [P2L][P2H] Press the button to set. Move on to setting of hysteresis.
Press the
button to set.
1: Selected parameter become effective after pressing the 2: After having setting effective by the seconds or longer.
button. button for 2
3: When "Err" is selected in output mode, after normal and reverse display function, the display will return to [F 2]. When "Err" is displayed except for Er2 and 3, switch output. 4: When using with OUT2 turned off, select "OFF" in output mode.
[F 3] Setting of response time

Select the response time of the switch output. Output chattering is prevented by setting the response time. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 3]. Press the button. Move on to setting of response time.
Setting of response time Press the or button to select response time.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 3] response time completed
[F 4] Setting of auto-preset
When hysteresis mode is selected, this function can calculate a optimum pressure value automatically based on the on-going operation. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 4]. Press the button. Move on to setting of auto-preset.
Setting of auto-preset Press the or button to select auto-preset.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 4] auto-preset completed
Press the button during measurement mode to set the pressure. Then press the button again to change the pressure to set when the display is blinking.
Auto-preset When auto-preset is selected in function selection mode, the set pressure can be calculated and memorized from measured value. The set value is automatically optimized by repeating the suction and release of the object for the setting. 1, Selection of auto-preset OUT1 Press the button in measurement mode to display "AP1". (If OUT1 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer after "AP1" is displayed to move to "AP2".) 2, Preparation of OUT1 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT1 is set. 3, Setting of auto-preset value of OUT1 Press the button to display "A1L". After measurement starts, operate the device and change the pressure. When the pressure change is detected, "A1H" will appear automatically, and so continue to operate the device repeatedly. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer during "A1L" displaying, measurement is stopped and "AP2" will appear.) 4, Selection of auto-preset OUT2 Press the button to set "P_1" and "H_1" ("n_1" and "H_1" for reverse mode) and display "AP2". (If OUT2 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer after "AP2" is displayed to move to measurement mode.) 5, Preparation and setting of OUT2 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT2 is set, and perform the setting of OUT2 in the same manner as that for OUT1. After "A2L" is displayed and measurements starts, when the pressure change is detected, "A2H" will appear automatically. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer during "A2L" displaying, measurement is stopped and measurement mode returns.) 6, Completion of setting Press the button to set "P_2" and "H_2" ("n_2" and "H_2" for reverse mode) and complete auto-preset mode. After that, measurement mode returns. The set values for OUT1 are displayed in auto-preset mode as follows. Normal output Reverse output P_1 = A-(A-B)/4 n_1 = B+(A-B)/4 A = Max. pressure H_1 = (A-B)/2 H_1 = (A-B)/2 B = Min. pressure The display of set values of OUT2 is changed at the number after "_", i.e. "P_2", "n_2" and "H_2". If this setting is unnecessary, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.
[F 5] Setting of analog output / auto-shift input

Auto-shift function This function is available when analog output/ auto-shift is equipped. Auto-shift: Function to perform output to relative change referring to the pressure when signal is input. Auto-shift zero: Function to perform output to relative change and clear the display value to zero referring to the pressure when signal is input. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 5]. Press the button. Move on to setting of function.
Setting of function Press the or button to select function.
[in] (Auto-shift input) selected. button Press the to set. [oUt] (Analog output) selected. button Press the to set. Return to function selection mode when analog output is selected. Setting of auto-shift function or Press the button to select auto-shift function.
Move on to auto-shift function setting.
Press the
button to set.
Move on to setting of effective output.
Setting of effective output or button to Press the select effective output.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 5] analog output / auto-shift input completed
Conditions and explanations for auto-shift function Keep constant pressure for 5 ms or longer from the close signal of auto-shift input. At auto-shift input, [ooo] is displayed for approximate 1 second. Pressure value at that time is memorized as corrected value [C_5]. With corrected value which is memorized, set value are compensated. Span is 10 ms or less until the switch output starts soon after auto-shift input. When the measured pressure exceeds the set pressure range at auto-shift input, corrected value is not memorized and [o.r] is displayed for approximate 1 second. If the pressure is within the set pressure range and beyond the set value corrected by auto-shift (including hysteresis) when the auto-shift input is applied, the set value is corrected to the upper limit or lower limit (which is closer) of the set pressure range automatically. (The correction is performed when the auto-shift input is applied at the pressure beyond the set pressure range. If the auto-shift input is applied again at the pressure within the set pressure range, the correction is released and the product operates along with the set value.) Completing pressure setting of OUT2, the corrected value and [C_5] will be displayed alternately. Press the button to return to the measurement mode. Corrected value [C_5] after auto-shift input will vanish when off the power, and is reset to zero (Initial value) when the power is re-supplied.
: EEPROM is not used for memory corrected value.
Using with auto-shift input, accepted set range is like below.

Range For compound For positive pressure For vacuum Set pressure range -105.0 to 105.0 kPa -0.105 to 1.050 MPa 10.0 to -105.0 kPa Accepted set range -210 to 210 kPa -1.155 to 1.155 MPa -115.0 to 115.0 kPa
[F 6] Setting of fine adjustment of display value

This is the function to perform fine adjustment of the displayed pressure manually. It is adjustable within the range 5%R.D. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F 6]. Press the button. Move on to setting of fine adjustment of display value.
Setting of fine adjustment of display value Press the pressure. or button to change the set
Press the If the and buttons are displayed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while [FSC] is displayed, the adjusted value is initialized.
button to set.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 6] fine adjustment of display value completed
[F11] Setting of display resolution

This function is to change the pressure display digit. The flickering on the display can be eliminated. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F11]. Press the button. Move on to setting of display resolution.
Setting of display resolution Press the or resolution. button to select display
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F11] display resolution completed
: Not selectable depending on selected pressure unit.
The display resolution selectable unit is MPa, kPa (for ZSE only), kgf/cm2, bar, psi and inHg. The unit kgf/cm2, bar, psi and inHg are selectable when a unit conversion function is provided. See [F 0] Unit conversion function on page 24.
[F80] Setting of power saving mode

Power saving mode is selectable. When the Pressure switch is left for 30 seconds without any operation, it is shifted to power saving mode. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F80]. Press the button. Move on to setting of power saving mode.
Setting of power saving mode Press the mode. or button to select power saving
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F80] power saving mode completed
Power saving mode 1 remains enabled until turned off. In power saving mode 1, the brightness of the whole display is reduced. In power saving mode 2, when keys are pressed the display is normal, but if no keys are pressed for 30 seconds, the display returns to power saving mode. (In measurement mode only)
On the display in power saving mode 2, only decimal points and indication lights flash. (The indication lights flash only when the switch is turn on.)
[F81] Setting of security code

Security code can be entered during the key lock is released. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F81]. Press the button. Move on to setting of security code.
Setting of security code Press the or button to select security code.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F81] security code completed If the security code is used, it is necessary to input the security code to release the key lock. The security code can be set optionally by operator. Default setting is "000". Refer to page 47 when the security code is used.
Special function setting [F90] Setting of all functions

All functions can be set in series. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F90]. Press the button. Move on to setting of all functions.
Setting of all functions Press the or button to select all functions.
[on] (used) selected. [oFF] (unused) selected. Press the to set. button After the change to [oFF] (unused), press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer. Setting of each function 1
[F90] setting of all functions completed

1: Setting of functions Every time Set by . or
Measurement mode
button is pressed, function turns in order of Function of setting on page 40. button.
Refer each paragraph for the detail of setting
Function of setting
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Selection of display unit Setting of output mode (OUT1) Setting of reversed output (OUT1) Setting of pressure (OUT1) Setting of hysteresis (OUT1) Setting of display color Setting of output mode (OUT2) Setting of reversed output (OUT2) Setting of pressure (OUT2) Setting of hysteresis (OUT2) Setting of response time Setting of auto-preset Setting of analog output/auto-shift input Setting of auto-shift function Setting of effective output Setting of initialization of fine adjustment of display value Setting of display resolution Setting of power saving mode Setting of security code All models All models All models All models
Function
Applicable model All models All models All models All models All models All models All models All models All models All models All models All models Only output type of R, T, S and V
: Measurement mode can return from any setting item by pressing the
: Function that will be set by the return to the measurement mode is memorized.
[F97] Selection of copy function

The set values of pressure and functions (except for corrected value of fine adjustment of display value) can be copied. When the pressure range and output and unit specifications are the same, this function becomes available. The set value can be copied up to 10 Pressure switches simultaneously. <Connection> Connect the Pressure switches after turning off the power supply. Connect the FUNC terminals of the master Pressure switch and the slave Pressure switches and turn on the power supply. The master Pressure switch is the switch from which the setting is copied. The slave Pressure switch is the switch to which the setting is copied.
button of the master Pressure switch in function selection mode to display [F97]. Press the button. Move on to the selection of copy function.
Selection of copy function Press the or button to select copy function.
Press the
button to set.
Press the
button to start copying. The master Pressure switch The slave Pressure switch Flashing (Green)
Sending/ Receiving
Flashing (Red)
Copy completed (Red) Press the button. The copy can be done continuously and the copy ready statues can be held even if the power supply is turned off. (Green)
Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.
Press the
button.
When completing copy function, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.
Setting of [F97] copy function completed
: If the copy to the slave Pressure switch is not completed, it is detected as a copying function sending/receiving error. Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to return to measurement mode. Then, check the wiring and specifications of the switch and retry copy function.

Output from the switch can be confirmed. It can be selected to provide or not to provide the output voluntarily. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F98]. Press the button. Move on to check of output.
Check of output Press the output. or button to select check of
[F] (forcibly output) selected. [n] (normal output) selected. Press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button to set.
OUT1 check of output Press the or button to select OUT1 check of output.
Press the
button to set.
Press the button to set after returning to [n] (normal output). Setting of [F98] check of output completed
Press and hold button for 2 seconds or more.
Measurement mode
: If
button is pressed and held for 2 seconds or more, the mode is returned to the measurement mode regardless of the current
mode.

When the setting of the Pressure switch becomes unsure, the default setting can be returned. <Operation> Press the or
button in function selection mode to display [F99]. Press the button. Move on to reset to the default setting.
Reset to the default setting Display [ON] with pressing the or button, then press the and buttons for 5 seconds or longer simultaneously.
[oFF] (unused) selected. Press the button to set.
The setting is reset to the default setting, and the mode returns to the function selection mode.
Return to function selection mode. Setting of [F99] reset to the default setting completed
Other Settings
Peak/Bottom hold value indication
The maximum (minimum) pressure from when the power is supplied to this moment is detected and updated. In peak/bottom indication mode, the pressure is indicated. As the peak indication, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the maximum pressure and "Hi" starts flashing, and is held. To release holding the indication of the maximum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again. The measurement mode returns. As the bottom indication, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the minimum pressure and "Lo" starts flashing and is held. To release holding the indication of the minimum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again. The measurement mode returns. If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while the pressure is being held, the maximum (minimum) value is cleared.
Zero clear
A displayed value can be adjusted to zero when the pressure to be measured is within 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) of the pressure at the time of shipment from the factory. (The range of 1%F.S. setting is different depending on the individual product difference) Press continuously the and buttons for 1 second or longer simultaneously, display is cleared as "0". Return to the measurement mode automatically.
Key lock
A wrong operation performed unintentionally such as change of set value can be prevented. If the button operation is performed while key lock setting is being performed, "LoC" is displayed for approximate 1 second. (When the button is pressed, the set pressure is displayed following "LoC".) <Operation -Without security code input- > 1, Keep pressing the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting "LoC" or "UnL" is displayed. (Releasing key lock can be done in the same way.)
2, Press the
or
button to select locking or unlocking of the key.
3, Press the
<Operation -With security code input- > Locking 1, Keep pressing the button for 5 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. [UnL] is indicated.
2, Press the
or
button to select locking of the key [LoC].
3, Press the
Unlocking 1, Keep pressing the button for 5 seconds or longer in the measurement mode. [LoC] is indicated.
2, Press the
or
button to select unlocking of the key [UnL].
3, When the button is pressed, the input of security code is asked. For how to input the security code, refer to "How to input and changethe security code" on page 48.
4, If inputted security code is correct, the indication changes to [UnL], and pressing one of , or button releases key lock and returns the measurement mode. If inputted security code is wrong, [FAL] is indicated and the security input mode is returned. If the wrong security code is inputted 3 times, [LoC] is indicated and the measurement mode is returned.
How to change the security code At the time of shipment, the security code is set to [000], but can be changed to optional one. <Operation> 1, After the lock setting is finished (page 47), perform all three steps in the unlock setting procedure. (page 47, "3,").
2, After the security code is inputted and the indication changes to [UnL], keep pressing and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. [000] is indicated and the change of security code is asked. For how to input the security code, refer to "How to input and change the security code". Changed security code is indicated.
3, After check it is as desired, press the button for 1 second or longer. The measurement mode is returned. At this time, if the or button is pressed, changed security code is not entered and the change of security code is asked.
How to input and change the security code The left digit starts flashing. Press the or button to set the value. button moves the flashing point to the right. Pressing the button is pressed at the last digit, the left digit starts (If the flashing again.) After the setting is finished, keep pressing button for 1 second or longer. (If the operation is not performed for 30 seconds during input and change of the security code, the measurement mode is returned.)
Maintenance
How to reset the product after power cut or forcible de-energizing The setting of the product will be retained as it was before a power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that before power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of whole facility before operating the product. If the facility is under accurate control, wait until the Pressure switch has warmed up. (Approximate 10 to 15 minutes)
If the security code is forgotten

The following mode is used only when the security code is forgotten. <Operation> Keep pressing the button for 5 seconds or longer in the of measurement mode. The current setting "UnL" or "LoC" is indicated.
Keep pressing and Then, keep pressing
buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer.
: There is no change of the indication.
(At this time, if the other operation is performed or no operation is performed for 30 seconds, the measurement mode returns.)
After that, keep pressing and buttons for 5 seconds or longer. The indication changes to [000] and the security code changing mode returns. (At this time, if another operation is performed or no operation is performed for 30 seconds, the measurement mode returns.) Refer to "How to change the security code" on page 48 and decide the security code. Changed security code is indicated. Check and press the button for 1 second or longer. The measurement mode returns. At this time, if the , or button is pressed, changed security code is not entered and the change of security code is asked.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Applicable Pressure switch: ZSE40A(F)/ISE40A If a cause applicable to the failure cannot be identified and normal operation can be recovered by replacement with a new Pressure switch, this indicates that the Pressure switch itself was broken. The Pressure switch breakage can be caused by operating environment (network construction, etc.), and so consult with SMC separately to obtain countermeasures.
The pressure switch does not operate normally
The switch output is on
The indication light is on
The indication light is off
Yes No
The switch output is off The indication light is on
The indication light is off
Refer to reference No.3 The switch output generates chattering Slow switch output response Refer to reference No.4
The indication light works improperly
Analog output is not provided (Specified accuracy is not satisfied)
An error signal comes on
The display is abnormal
Yes No
The display flashes
Pressure indication difference when using two or more pressure switches The indication accuracy does not satisfy the specifications The unit cannot be changed
The body has become loose
There is a noise
Copy function error
Not able to copy
Slave pressure switch does not complete copying

Reference No. Problem Output remains on. Indication light remains on. Output remains off. Indication light remains off. Output remains on. Indication light works correctly. Possible cause Investigation method (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check the settings of the operation mode, hysteresis and output style. (Hysteresis mode/window comparator mode, normal output/reversed output) Check the wiring of the output line. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check the wiring of the output line. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check if PNP is used even though NPN should have been selected, or the other way around. Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire. (Bending radius and tensile force applied to the lead wire) Check the wiring. Check if the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure). (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check if the hysteresis range is too narrow. (3) Check the response time set as initial setting. Check if the response time is too short. Countermeasure
(1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Reset the setting of function.
Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure Incorrect wiring
Replace the product. Correct the wiring. Replace the product. Correct the wiring.
Output remains off. Indication light works correctly.
Review the selected model (output type). Correct the wiring conditions. (Adjust the tensile force and widen the bending radius.) Replace the product.
Lead wire breakage Product failure
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Switch output generates chattering. Wrong setting
(1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Widen the hysteresis. (3) Reset the setting of function. Replace the product.
Product failure Check the pressure setting. Check if the detected pressure and the set pressure value have the same value or are too close.
Reset the pressure setting. Set up the pressure setting value so it is not too close to the detected pressure value.
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause Incorrect wiring Non-compliance with the load spec.
Investigation method Check if the analog output line is connected with a load. (1) Check if the proper load is connected. (2) Check if input impedance of input equipment (A/D transformer) is proper. Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy in 10 minutes after supplying power.
Countermeasure Correct the wiring.
Analog output is not provided. (Specified accuracy is not satisfied.)
Connect a proper load.
After energizing, indication and output can drift. For detecting fine pressure, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product.
Product failure (1) Check if a current of 80mA or more is flowing to the output. (2) Check if the connected load satisfies the specifications, and if the load is shorted. (3) Check if a relay without a surge voltage suppressor is connected. (4) Check if the wiring is in the same route as (or bundled together with) a high-voltage line or the power line. (1) Check if there is noise interference such as static electricity. Check if there is a noise source (2) Check if the power supply voltage is in the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Over current to the output (Er1 and 2)
(1)(2) Connect the load as specified. (3) Use a relay with a surge voltage suppressor or take a measure to prevent noise. (4) Separate the wiring from the high-voltage line and/or power line. (1) Remove the noise and the noise source (or take measures to prevent noise interference), and reset the product or turn off the power supply. Then, supply the power again. (2) Supply power voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. (1) Bring the pressure back within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from getting into the piping. (1) Bring the pressure back within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from getting into the piping. Return the applied pressure to atmospheric pressure, and retry the zero clear operation. Replace the product.
An over current error (Er1 and 2) is indicated.
System error
(Er0, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9) is indicated. 7 The display shows "HHH". The display shows "LLL". Residual pressure error (Er3) is indicated.
Improper transaction of the internal data of the Pressure switch (Er0, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9)
Applied pressure is over the upper limit (HHH).
(1) Check if the pressure gets over the upper limit of the set pressure range. (2) Check if foreign matter got into the piping. (1) Check if the pressure gets below the lower limit of the set pressure range. (2) Check if foreign matter got into the piping. Check if the pressure over 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) of the atmospheric pressure is applied.
Applied pressure is under the lower limit (LLL). Pressure is not atmospheric pressure at zero-clear operation (Er3) Product failure
Reference No.
Problem
Investigation method Check if the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Countermeasure Supply power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Indicated values fluctuate.
Incorrect wiring
Check the wiring to the power supply. Check if the brown and blue wires are Correct the wiring. connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure). If the fluctuation is not acceptable, the number of digit can be changed by the setting of the resolution of display. Supply power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Reset the setting of function.
Factory pressure Check if the factory pressure is change changed.
Incorrect power supply Indicator turns off. 9 A part of the indication misses. Power saving mode
Check if the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check if the power saving mode is selected. Check the power supply wiring. Check if the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure).
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Product failure The peak value/bottom value indication mode is selected. Wiring failure
Replace the product. Turn off the peak value/bottom value indication mode. (1) Correct the wiring. (2) Correct the wiring (bending radius and stress). Use the fine adjustment mode to adjust the indication if the dispersion is within the indication accuracy range. Replace the product.
Check if the peek value or bottom value indicating mode is selected. (1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if bending stress is being applied to a specific part of the lead wire. Check if the dispersion is within the indication accuracy range.
10
Indicator is blinking.
11
Pressure indication difference when using two or more Pressure switches.
Dispersion within the indication accuracy range Product failure
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause
Countermeasure Install a 5 m filter to prevent foreign matter from getting into the pressure port. Also, clean the filter regularly to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the piping. If excessive tightening torque over the specified range is applied, a mounting screw, mounting bracket, and product may be broken. After energizing, indication and output can drift. For detecting fine pressure, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product. "M" in the part number means that the unit cannot be changed. (kPaMPa can be selected) : The unit change function is not available in Japan due to a new measurement law. : It is fixed to the SI unit "kPa", "MPa". Replace the product.
Foreign matter
Check if foreign matter has entered the pressure port.
12
The pressure indication accuracy does not satisfy the specifications.
Check if air and liquid are leaking from the piping.
Product failure
13
The unit cannot be changed.
Improper model selection (Selection of model "without unit conversion function")
Check if there is a "-M" at the end of the part number printed on the product
Product failure 14 The buttons cannot be operated. The body is loose. Key lock mode Product failure Incorrect installation Product failure Check that the panel mounting adapter and the body are firmly engaged. Check if the key lock mode is turned on.
Turn off the key lock mode. Replace the product. Mount the body on the panel properly. Replace the product. Rework the piping. If excessive tightening torque over the specified range is applied, a mounting screw, mounting bracket, and product may be broken. Replace the product.
15
16
Noisy.
Check if air liquid are leaking from the piping.
Product failure Copy function error Unable to copy Incorrect wiring Product failure (1) Check the connection at FUNC terminal. (2) Check the power supply wiring.
17
Correct the wiring. Replace the product.
Reference No.
Problem
Possible cause
Countermeasure (1) Correct the wiring. (2) The maximum transmitting distance of the copy function is 4 m. Shorten the lead wire to 4 m or less. Check the models. Copying is available when the pressure range, output specification and unit specification are identical. The number of connected products with which copying at a time is possible is up to 10 pcs. Reduce the number to 10 pcs or less. Replace the product.
Incorrect wiring
(1) Check the connection at FUNC terminal. Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check the length of lead wire.
18
Slave Pressure switch does not complete copying.
Improper model
The models of the master Pressure switch and the slave Pressure switch are different from each other.
Error in connected product numbers Product failure Effect of pressure source fluctuation due to small hysteresis or too early of a response time Incorrect wiring/ lead wire breakage Product failure
Check the number of connected slave Pressure switches.
(1) Check the set pressure (hysteresis) (2) Check the response time
19
The operation is unstable. (Chattering)
(1) Check the pressure setting. (2) Reset the setting of function.
(1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if bending stress is applied to a specific part of the lead wire. (bending radius and tensile force applied to the lead wire)
(1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring conditions. (Adjust the tensile force and widen the bending radius.) Replace the product.

Error Name Error Display Error Type Troubleshooting Method Turn the power off and remove the output factor for the over current. Then turn the power on.
Over current Error
A load current of switch output is 80 mA or more.
Residual Pressure Error
During zero clear operation, pressure over 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S.for compound pressure) is applied. After 1 s, the mode will reset to the measurement mode. 1%F.S. of the zero clear range varies with individual product differences. Pressure has exceeded the upper limit of the set pressure range. Pressure has exceeded the lower limit of the set pressure range. The measured pressure at auto-shift input exceeds the set pressure range.
: After 1 s, measurement mode returns automatically.
Pressurizing Error
Auto-shift Error
Auto-shift input is invalid. Check the connected equipment and machine.
System Error
Specification
Specifications
Model No. Rated pressure range Set pressure range Withstand pressure Min. display unit Applicable fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection Repeatability Hysteresis mode Hys teresis Window comparetor mode Output Voltage Voltage (rated pressure range) output Linearity 2 Output impedance Analog output Output current (rated pressure range) ZSE40A (For vacuum) ZSE40AF (For compound) ISE40A (For positive pressure)
0 to -101.3 kPa -100.0 to 100.0 kPa -0.100 to 1.000 MPa 10.0 to -105.0 kPa -105.0 to 105.0 kPa -0.105 to 1.050 MPa 500 kPa 500 kPa 1.5 MPa 0.1 kPa 0.1 kPa 0.001 MPa Air, inert gases and incombustible gases 12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% or less (Protected against inverse connection) 45 mA or less NPN or PNP open collector output 2 outputs 80 mA 28 V (NPN output) 1 V or less (at 80 mA load current) 2.5 ms or less (Chattering-proof function working: 20, 100, 500, 1000 or 2000 ms selected) Provided 0.2%F.S. 1 digit 0 to variable 1 1 to 5 V 2.5%F.S. 1%F.S. Approx. 1 k 4 to 20 mA 2.5%F.S. 1%F.S. Max. load impedance: 300 (at power supply voltage of 12 VDC) 600 (at power supply voltage of 24 VDC) Min. load impedance: 50 Non-voltage input (reed or solid state), Low level 0.4 V or less, input times 5 ms or more 3 1/2digits 7-segment display, Dual-color display (red/green) 2%F.S. 1 digit (at ambient temperature 253 C) Light when ON OUT1, OUT2: Orange IP65 Operation: -5 to 50 C, Storage: -10 to 60 C (No condensation or freezing) Operation, Storage: 35 to 85%RH (No condensation) 1000 VAC, 1 minute Between lead block and case 50 M or more at 500 VDC Between lead block and case 2%F.S. (25 C reference) Oil resistance vinyl cabtyre cable 5 cores 3.5, 2 m Sectional area of conductor: 0.15 mm2 (AWG26) Outside diameter of insulator: 0.95 mm CE, UL/CSA, RoHS 2.4 to 20 mA 2.5%F.S. 0.6 to 5 V 2.5%F.S.
Current Linearity output

3
Load impedance Auto-shift input Display method Indicator accuracy Indication light Enclosure Ambient temperature range Environ Ambient humidity range ment Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Temperature characteristic Lead wire Standard
chattering will occur.
1: If the applied voltage fluctuates around the set value, the hysteresis more than the fluctuating width needs to be set. Otherwise, 2: If analog voltage output is selected, the analog current output cannot be selected at the same time. 3: If analog current output is selected, the analog voltage output cannot be selected at the same time.
Piping specifications
Model No. 01 R1/8 (with M5 female thread) Pressure sensing part Wetted part material C3602 (Electro less nickel plating) O-ring: HNBR 78 g 79 g 97 g N01 NPT1/8 (with M5 female thread) W1 WF1 M5 M50.8 (Female) C4 One-touch fitting 4 C6 One-touch fitting 6
Port size
Rc1/8
G1/8
Silicone ZDC2, POM, SUS304, C304 (Electro less nickel plating) O-ring: HNBR 104 g 101 g 101 g
Piping port
ZDC2 O-ring: HNBR 97 g
Weight
Analog output
Voltage output Current output
Range For vacuum For compound For positive pressure
Rated pressure range 0.0 to -101.3 kPa -100.0kPa to 100.0 kPa -0.100 to 1.000 MPa
A -0.1 MPa
B 0 -100 kPa 0
C -101.3 kPa 100 kPa 1 MPa
Dimensions
01/N01 type
C4/C6 type
W1/WF1 type
Mounting by bracket
Bracket A 01/N01 type
W1/WF1 type
Bracket B W1/WF1 type
Bracket D 01/N01 type
W1/WF1 type
Mounting by panel mount adapter

01/N01 type
W1/WF1/M5/C4/C6 type
Mounting by panel mount adapter + Front protective cover

01/N01 type
W1/WF1/M5/C4/C6 type
Panel cutout dimension
Revision history A: Revision
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2009-2010 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved No.PS##-OMM0007-A
No.PS##-OMM0003-B
PRODUCT NAME

ZSE80(F) ISE80(H)
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model Indication and How to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and Installation Installation Piping Wiring Pressure Setting Measurement mode Function Setting Function selection mode Default setting F0 Unit selection function F1 Setting of OUT1 F2 Setting of OUT2 F3 Response time F4 Analogue output / Auto-shift input F5 Display resolution F7 Fine adjustment of display value F8 Auto-preset function F9 Power saving mode F10 Security code Special function setting F98 Setting of all functions F99 Reset to the default setting Other Settings Maintenance If the security code is forgotten Troubleshooting Specifications Dimensions 2 9 10 11 15 15 18 19 21 21 23 23 23 25 26 29 29 30 32 33 34 36 37 38 38 40 41 44 44 45 52 54
-1No.PS##-OMM0003-B
Safety Instructions
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications. Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results. The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its latest catalogue information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the equipment. 2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment. The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced. 3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed. 1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed. 2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products carefully. 3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction. 4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions. 1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight. 2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard specifications described in the product catalogue. 3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis. 4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical protective function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
-2No.PS##-OMM0003-B
Caution


1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered. 2) Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalogue for the particular products.
-3No.PS##-OMM0003-B
Operator
Safety Instructions
Warning



Caution
Stop operation if the equipment does not function properly or there is a leakage of fluid. When leakage occurred from other parts except piping, the product might break. Cut off power supply and stop supplying fluid. Do not apply fluid at leaking condition. Safety cannot be assured in the case of unexpected malfunction.
Use ferule made by Swagelock (trade name: Swagelock fittings) for TSJ fittings, packing and glands made by Cajon (trade name: Cajon VCR fittings) for URJ fittings.
Otherwise safety may not be secured due to leakage from joint. When using ferules, packing or glands made by other manufacture, be sure to perform helium leak test to verify no leakage.
-4No.PS##-OMM0003-B
NOTE
Product specifications The direct current power supply to combine should be UL approved as follows.
mark on the body.

Input data to the Pressure switch is not deleted, even if the power supply is cut off. (Writing time: 1,000,000 times, Data duration: 10 years after power off) Applicable fluid is a fluid that does not corrode SUS630 and SUS304.


-5No.PS##-OMM0003-B
Product handling
Never mount a product in a location that will be used as a foothold.

Wire correctly.


Do not use a cable longer than 10m. Wire the DC (-) line (blue) as close as possible to the power supply.
When analogue output is used, install a noise filter (line noise filter, ferrite element, etc.) between the switch-mode power supply and this product.
-6No.PS##-OMM0003-B
Environment Do not use the product in an environment that is constantly exposed to the splash of water.
Otherwise failure or malfunction can result. Take measures such as using a cover.
Do not use the product in an environment where corrosive gases or fluids could be splashed.
Otherwise damage to the product and malfunction can result.
If the product is to be used in an environment containing oils or chemicals such as coolant or cleaning solvent, even for a short time, it may be adversely affected (damage, malfunction, or hardening of the lead wires)


The product is CE marked, but not immune to lightning strikes. Take measures against lightning strikes in the system. Mount the product in a place that is not exposed to vibration or impact.



The fluid and ambient temperatures is 5 to 50 oC. Operation under low temperature (5 oC or less) leads to cause damage or operation failure due to frozen moist in the fluid or air. Protection against freezing is necessary. Air dryer is recommended for elimination of drain and water. Avoid sudden temperature change even within specified temperature.

Use operating fluid which does not corrode the part in contact with fluid which is made of SUS630 (for sensing part) or SUS304 (for fitting part). (Compatibility between fluid and material can be checked by contact to fluid supplier.) Adjustment and Operation Turn the power on after connecting a load.


There will be a drift on the display and the analogue output of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on.

The Pressure switch is compulsory turned off for 4 seconds after power supplied. For 4 seconds after supplying power, the measurement output is turned off. Do not touch the LCD during operation.
-7No.PS##-OMM0003-B


Other If there is a possibility of water or drainage getting in, narrow the diameter of the piping to the Pressure switch, or make an orifice in the middle of the piping.
Although this Pressure switch uses stainless diaphragm pressure sensor which is not damaged by water, the drain contained in the air or water during vacuum release after confirming vacuuming collides with the pressure sensor and the inertia force of water or air containing the drain can damage the pressure sensor, and correct display of the pressure may not be available. Extra attention is needed when the rear surface piping type is used.
The use of a resin piping can cause static electricity depending on the fluid. Therefore, when connecting the Pressure switch, take appropriate measures against static electricity and separate the grounding for the Pressure switch from the grounding for other equipment which may generate a strong electromagnetic noise or high frequency. Otherwise, static electricity may damage the Pressure switch.
-8No.PS##-OMM0003-B
Accessories / Part numbers

Description Bracket Piping direction Rear surface piping Bottom piping Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Rear surface piping Bottom piping Rear surface piping Bottom piping Part number ZS-24-A ZS-24-D ZS-35-A ZS-35-C ZS-35-B ZS-35-F ZS-35-E
-9No.PS##-OMM0003-B

Indicator LED (Orange): Displays switch output condition. LCD display: Displays the current status of pressure, setting mode, selected indication unit and error code. Four display modes can be selected: display always in red or green, or display changing from green to red, or red to green, according to the output status. button (UP): Selects the mode or increases the ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the peak display mode. button (DOWN): Selects the mode or decreases the ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the bottom display mode. button (SET): Press this button to change to another mode and to set a value.
-10No.PS##-OMM0003-B

Terms 2 7 A 2-colour display 7-segment display Analogue current output Analogue output function Analogue voltage output Meaning 2 colours are used to indicate a value, which change according to the output status. When "8" is shown on the display. It is called 7-segment because 8 consists of 7 pieces of "- (segments)". Refer to "Analogue output (function)". A function to output the voltage or current in proportion to the pressure. Refer to "Analogue output (function)". A function to automatically set up the pressure by having equipment hold and release a workpiece via vacuum adsorption. This function is used in an application where vacuum adsorption of a workpiece is confirmed by a Pressure switch. A function to correct the set value of the switch output in accordance with the applied pressure in case the switch operation is unstable due to pulsation of applied pressure. This function is used in applications such as vacuum adsorption. The pressure when a signal is externally input is set as a reference value with which the pressure that turns the switch on or off can be shifted. Indicates the minimum pressure reached up to that moment. The problem of the switch output turning ON and OFF repeatedly around the set value at high frequency due to the effect of pulsation. A function to delay the response time of switch output in order to prevent chattering. Shows how precisely the pressure can be indicated or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1 kPa, e.g., 1, 2, 3, , 99, 100. With the self-diagnostic function of the Pressure switch, this indicates that there is an error which could cause a switch failure. Refer to "Fine adjustment of display value". A displayed pressure value can be adjusted within the range of 5% R.D. (5% of the displayed value). It is used if a true pressure value is known or to correct the difference of a displayed value of the measurement equipment nearby which measures the same pressure. Abbreviation for full span or full scale; this means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. For example, when the output voltage is 1 to 5[V], the F.S. will be 5-1 = 4[V]. (Ref: 1% F.S. = 4 0.01 = 0.04[V]) This is a mode in which each function is set up, and is a separate menu from the pressure setup. If the setting needs to be changed, "F*", each item can be set up. The items to be set up are: display colour, operation mode, output type, response time, display resolution, fine adjustment of indicated value, auto preset, power-saving mode and security code number.
Auto preset
Auto shift
B C
Bottom value display Chattering Chattering preventing function
D Digit (Minimum setting unit) E F
Error indication Fine adjustment mode Fine adjustment of display value
Terms H Hysteresis Hysteresis mode I Indication accuracy Indication colour Indicator LED Insulation resistance Indication resolution Indication unit Internal voltage drop K L M Key lock (function) Load impedance Manual setup Max. applied voltage Max. load current Max. (Min.) load impedance Measurement mode Min. setting unit N Normal output
Meaning The difference between the pressure switch ON and OFF points, used to prevent chattering Refer to "List of output modes" on page 28. The deviation between displayed pressure value and the true pressure. The colour of the digital display. There are four choices: normally green, normally red, green (off) to red (on), and red (off) to green (on). The LED that turns on when the switch output is on. Insulation resistance of the product itself. The resistance between an electricical circuit and the pressure switch body. How fine the rated pressure range can be segmented. (Example: If a product for 0 to 1 MPa can indicate pressure by 0.001 MPa, the display resolution is 1/1000.) The unit of pressure used on the display. Refer to "Residual voltage". A function that locks the setting buttons so that no accidental setting changes can be made. Refer to "Max. load impedance". Manual pressure set up without using auto preset. This term is used to distinguish from the pressure set up using auto preset. The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output wire of the NPN output. The maximum current available to the output wire of the switch output. The maximum (minimum) load (resistance value and impedance) which can be connected to the output (output wire) of the analogue current output. The condition in which the pressure is detected and displayed and the switch output is operating. (Refer to "Measurement mode" on page 21.) Refer to "digit". The switch output operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure equal to or greater than the set value is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it is the operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure is within the switch output range (P1L to P1H or P2L to P2H). (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 28). The switch output which uses the NPN transistor for output.
NPN (open collector) output
Terms O Operating mode Orifice A restriction.
Meaning There are two choices, hysteresis mode and window comparator mode. The resistance value of a component between the voltage output element and the analogue voltage output. It is indicated as a resistance value which is converted in accordance with the condition in which resistance is directly connected to the voltage output element. There may be an error in the output voltage depending on this output impedance and the input impedance of customers' equipment. (example: If the Pressure switch with output impedance of 1k is connected to the A/D converter to detect the analogue output of 5V, the detected voltage by the A/D converter becomes 5(V) 1(M)/(1(k) + 1(M)) 4.995(V), and there is an error of approximate 0.005 V). The operation type of the switch output. Either normal output or reversed output can be selected. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 28). Displays the maximum pressure reached up to that moment. The size of the port on the switch body with which a device can be connected. The switch output that uses the PNP transistor for output. The condition in which the display is turned off to reduce current consumption. The pressure-detecting part of a pressure-detecting element. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off. The pressure beyond which the Pressure switch will be damaged. The pressure range in which the Pressure switch meets the specifications. Values outside of this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot be guaranteed to meet the product specifications. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes. The difference between the ideal ON voltage and the actual voltage when the switch output is on. It depends on present load current and ideally should be "0".. Refer to "Indication resolution". The elapsed time until the ON-OFF output begins operating, since the pressure supplied to the Pressure switch has reached the set value. Generally, the shorter the response time, the better the performance. The switch output operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure equal to or less than the set value is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it indicates the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure is outside the switch output range (n1L to n1H or n2L to n2H). (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 28). A type of chattering.
Output impedance
Output type P Peak value display Piping-port size PNP (open collector) output Power saving mode Pressure-sensing part Pressure setting Proof pressure R Rated pressure range
Repeatability Residual voltage Resolution Response time
Reversed output
Ripple
Terms S Sampling cycle Setting of function Setting pressure range Stainless steel diaphragm Switch output T U TSJ fitting URJ fitting
Meaning The frequency in which the detected pressure should be reflected to the digital display. See "Function selection mode". The pressure range within which the switch output can be set. A stainless steel pressure-detecting part of the pressure-detecting element. It is suitable for measuring fluid such as water. Alternatively called "ON-OFF output". Abbreviation for Tube Swage Joint. The recommended fitting is Swagelok fitting made by Swagelok. Abbreviation for Union Ring Joint. The recommended fitting is VCR fitting made by Swagelok. Function to change the unit in which the value of pressure is displayed. Only a product with this function can change the unit. A product with Unit selection function cannot be purchased if it is used within Japan. Pressure is indicated only by SI units in Japan. The part of the Pressure switch which is in contact with the detected fluid, such as a pressure sensor, seal, or fitting. An output type which holds the output when the pressure is within a certain range. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 28). The ability to withstand a voltage applied between an electrical circuit and the body. If more voltage is applied to the product, the product may be damaged. (voltage mentioned here is not power voltage to activate the product). The function which can adjust the displayed pressure value to "0".
Unit selection function
Wetted part (or part exposed to fluid) Window comparator mode
Withstand voltage Z Zero clear function

Installation
Mounting
Mount the optional bracket and panel mount adapter to the Pressure switch. When the Pressure switch is to be mounted in a place where water and dust splashes occur, insert a tube (O.D 4 mm, I.D 2.5 mm) into the air-relieving port of the Pressure switch.

Fix the bracket to the Pressure switch with the set screws M35 L (2 pcs.) supplied. The required tightening torque is 0.98 Nm or less. <Rear piping>
<Bottom piping>

<Rear piping>
<Bottom piping>
Panel cut-out dimensions

Options Panel mount adapter (Panel mount adapter A and B included) Model: ZS-35-B (Bottom piping) ZS-35-C (Rear piping) Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Model: ZS-35-E (Bottom piping) ZS-35-F (Rear piping)
: Panel thickness 1.0 to 5.0 mm
Piping
Connection using screw type piping
Connect suitable piping to the port. To connect the hexagon socket head plug or fitting to the pressure port, hold the hexagon part of the pressure port with a suitable spanner. The required tightening torque is 13.6 Nm or less.
Tube attachment
When the Pressure switch is used in a place where water and dust splashes may occur, insert a tube into the air-relieving port, and route the other end of the tube to a safe place away from water and dust. (refer to the figure below). <Rear piping>
<Bottom piping>
: Insert the tube into the air-relieving port until it bottoms out. : SMC TU0425 (polyurethane, O.D 4, I.D 2.5) suits to the Pressure switch.
Wiring
Connection
Connections should only be made with the power supply turned off. Use a separate route for the Pressure switch wiring and any power or high voltage wiring. Otherwise, malfunction may result due to noise. Ensure that the FG terminal is connected to ground when using a commercially available switch-mode power supply. When a switch-mode power supply is connected to the product, switching noise will be superimposed and the product specification can no longer be met. This can be prevented by inserting a noise filter, such as a line noise filter and ferrite core, between the switch-mode power supply and the product, or by using a series power supply instead of a switch-mode power supply.
-N NPN open collector output type Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-P PNP open collector output type Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-S/-R (Analogue output mode) Switch output NPN open collector output type 2 output Max. 28 V, 8 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less R: Analogue output 1 to 5 V Output impedance 1 k S: Analogue output 4 to 20 mA Max. load impedance Power supply voltage 12 V: 300 Power supply voltage 24 V: 600 Min. load impedance 50
-S/-R (Auto-shift input mode) With auto-shift switch output NPN open collector output type 2 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-V/-T (Analogue output mode) Switch output PNP open collector output type 2 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less T: Analogue output 1 to 5 V Output impedance 1 k V: Analogue output 4 to 20 mA Max. load impedance Power supply voltage 12 V: 300 Power supply voltage 24 V: 600 Min. load impedance 50
-V/-T (Auto-shift input mode) With auto-shift switch output PNP open collector output type 2 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-A NPN 2 output type Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-B PNP 2 output type Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
Pressure Setting
Measurement mode
The measurement mode is the condition where the pressure is detected and displayed, and the switch function is operating. This is the basic mode, and other modes should be selected for setting changes and other function settings.
Setting the ON and OFF points of the Pressure switch. Operation (Hysteresis mode) When the pressure exceeds a set point, the Pressure switch will be turned ON. When the pressure falls below the set point by the amount of hysteresis or more, the Pressure switch will be turned OFF. The default setting of the Pressure switch is adjusted to be turned on at the central value between atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of rated pressure range, and turned off when the pressure decreases by 5% of the span between atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of rated pressure range. (to change this setting, refer to page 22). If this condition, shown below, is acceptable, then keep these settings.
<How to operate> : The Pressure switch will also output during setting. 1, Press the button once in measurement mode. (Page 23)
2, [P_1] or [n_1] and the set value are displayed in turn.
3, Press the or button to change the set value. The button is to increase and the button is to decrease. Press the value. button once to increase by one digit, and press it continuously to keep increasing the set
Press the value.
button once to decrease by one digit, and press it continuously to keep decreasing the set
4, Press the button to finish the setting. For models with 2 outputs, [P_2] or [n_2] will be displayed. Set as above.
: If the button is pressed for 2 seconds or longer, the setting is fixed and measurement mode returns.
The Pressure switch operates within a set pressure range (from P1L to P1H) during window comparator mode. Set P1L (switch lower limit) and P1H (switch upper limit) with the setting procedure above. (When reversed output is selected, [n1L] and [n1H] are displayed.) (to change to window comparator mode, refer to page 26).
Zero clear of Display The display is reset to zero when the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second. For the first operation, always perform zero clear with no pressure applied.
Function Setting
In measurement mode, press the button for 2 seconds or longer to display [F 0]. Select to display the function to be changed, [F ]. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer in function selection mode to return to measurement mode.
: Some functions are not available depending on part number. All functions are displayed with [F description. If a function is not available, the function is displayed as [- - -].
] followed by the function
Default setting
At the time of shipment, the following settings are provided. If this condition is acceptable, then keep these settings. To change the settings, enter function selection mode. [F 0] Unit selection function
Symbol Nil or M P Model ISE80(H) ZSE80(F) ISE80(H) ZSE80(F)
See page 25
Item Output mode Reversed output
See page 26
Description Default setting Hysteresis mode Normal output ISE80: 0.500 MPa ZSE80: -50.5 kPa ZSE80F: 50.0 kPa ISE80H: 1.000 MPa ISE80: 0.050 MPa ZSE80: 5.1 kPa ZSE80F: 5.0 kPa ISE80H: 0.100 MPa ON: Green OFF: Red
Select hysteresis mode or window comparator mode. Select reversed output.
Pressure setting
Set the ON or OFF point of the switch output.
Hysteresis
Set the hysteresis to prevent chattering.
Display colour
Select the display colour.
[F 2] Setting of OUT2 See page 29 Same setting as [F 1] OUT1. The display colour is linked to the setting of OUT1, and can not be set for OUT2. Other parameter settings
Item [F 3] Response time [F 4] Analogue output / Auto-shift input [F 5] Display resolution [F 7] Fine adjustment of display value [F 8] Auto-preset function [F 9] Power saving mode [F10] Security code [F98] Setting of all functions [F99] Reset to the default setting Page page 29 page 30 page 32 page 33 page 34 page 36 page 37 page 38 page 40 Default setting 2.5 ms Analogue output 1000-split 0 Manual OFF OFF OFF OFF

Only the product with Unit selection function can be set. The displayed unit can be changed, and depends on the pressure range. (Refer to the table below for the minimum indication unit). (kPa/MPa units are available when the product does not have the unit selection function.) <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 0]. Press the Select the Display Unit Press the or button to select the display unit. button. Move on to select the display unit.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 0] Unit selection function completed
Display unit and minimum setting unit

Unit MPa kPa kgf/cm2 bar psi InHg mmHg ZSE80F 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 ZSE80 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 ISE80 0.001 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 ISE80H 0.001 (to 1.999) 0.01 (2.00 to) 0.01 (to19.99) 0.1 (20.0 to) 0.01 (to 19.99) 0.1 (20.0 to) 0.1 (to 199.9) 1 (200 to) -
Set output method of OUT1. The output turns on when the pressure exceeds the set value. The default setting of the output set value is the central value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. The display colour depends on the condition of OUT1. The default setting of the display colour is as follows: green display when the output is ON and red display when the output is OFF. For the operation of each setting, refer to "List of output modes" on page 28. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 1]. Press the Select output mode Press the or button to select output mode. button. Move on to setting output mode.
Press the Select reversed output Press the or
button to set.
button to select reversed output.
Press the Pressure Setting
button to set.
Set the pressure based on the setting procedure on page 22. "P" becomes "n" when reversed output is selected. ([P_1] [n_1]) Hysteresis mode: [P_1] Window comparator mode: [P1L][P1H] Press the button to set. Move on to setting of hysteresis.
Press the Setting of display colour Press the or
button to set.
Move on to setting of display colour.
button to select display colour.
Press the
button to set.

1: The selected parameter becomes effective after pressing the button. button again.
2: After setting, it is possible to move to measurement mode by pressing the
List of output modes
If the set point when the switch output is changed is outside the set pressure range due to switching between normal and reversed output, the hysteresis will automatically be compensated.
: The above figure shows the operation of OUT1. For the operation of OUT2, "1" shown in the figure above becomes "2". (Ex) P_1 P_2
Set output method of OUT2. The display colour is linked to the setting of OUT1, and can not be set for OUT2 <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 2]. Press the button. Move on to setting output mode.
Set [F 2] based on [F 1] setting of OUT1 (page 26 to 28).
[F 3] Response time (chattering prevention function)

Select the response time of the switch output. Output chattering can be prevented by setting the response time. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 3]. Press the Setting of response time Press the or button to select response time. button. Move on to setting of response time.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 3] Response time completed
[F 4] Analogue output / Auto-shift input

Auto-shift function This function is available when the analogue output / auto-shift input option has been selected. Auto-shift: A function where the switch output is determined by the change in pressure, relative to a reference set value, when an external signal is input. Auto-shift zero: A function where the switch output is determined by the change in pressure, relative to a reference set value, and the display reset to zero, when an external signal is input. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 4]. Press the Setting of function Press the or button to select the function. button. Move on to setting of function.
Press the
button to set. Move on to auto-shift function setting when auto-shift input is selected.
Setting of Auto-shift function Press the or button to select auto-shift function. Return to function selection mode when analogue output is selected.
Press the
button to set.
Move on to setting of effective output.
Setting of effective output Press the or button to select effective output.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 4] Analogue output/Auto-shift input completed
Conditions and explanations for auto-shift function Maintain a constant pressure for 5 ms or longer from the end of the auto-shift input signal. At auto-shift input, [ooo] is displayed for approximate 1 second. The measured pressure value at that time is stored as the corrected value [C_5]. With the corrected value stored, the set value is compensated. The switch output will start within 10 ms of the auto-shift input signal. If the measured pressure exceeds the set pressure range during auto-shift input signal, the corrected value will not be stored and [o.r] is displayed for approximately 1 second. If the pressure is within the set pressure range and beyond the set value corrected by auto-shift (including hysteresis) when the auto-shift input is applied, the set value is corrected to the upper limit or lower limit (whichever is closer) of the set pressure range automatically. (The correction is performed when the auto-shift input is applied at the pressure beyond the set pressure range. If the auto-shift input is applied again at the pressure within the set pressure range, the correction is released and the product operates according to the set value). After completing the pressure setting of OUT2, the corrected value and [C_5] will be displayed in turn. Press the button to return to measurement mode. The corrected value [C_5] after auto-shift input will disappear when the power is turned off, and will reset to zero (initial value) when the power is returned.
: The EEPROM is not used for the memory corrected value.
Using the Auto-shift input, the acceptable set range is as follows:

Range Compound 1 MPa 2 MPa Vacuum Set pressure range -110.0 to 110.0 kPa -0.105 to 1.100 MPa -0.105 to 2.20 MPa 10.0 to -111.0 kPa Accepted set range -220 to 220 kPa -1.205 to 1.205 MPa -2.31 to 2.31 MPa -121.0 to 121.0 kPa
[F 5] Display resolution
This function is used to change the pressure display resolution. This can be used to prevent the digits from flickering on the display. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 5]. Press the Setting of display resolution Press the or button to select display resolution. button. Move on to setting of display resolution.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 5] Display resolution completed

: Not selectable depending on the selected display units. The display resolution selectable unit is MPa (only for ISE), kPa (only for ZSE), bar and psi. (the units "bar" and "psi" are selectable only for models with the unit selection function. See [F 0] Unit selection function on page 25.)

This function is used to manually perform fine adjustment of the displayed pressure. It is adjustable within the range 5% R.D. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 7]. Press the button. Move on to setting of fine adjustment of display value.
Setting of fine adjustment of display value Press the or pressure value. button to change the set
Press the
button to set.
Press the Setting of initializing of adjustment (to initialize the adjusted value) Press the adjustment. or
button.
Move on to setting of adjustment initialize.
button to select the initializing of
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 7] Fine adjustment of display value completed
When hysteresis mode is selected, the auto-preset function can calculate an optimum pressure value automatically based on the on-going operation. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 8]. Press the Setting of Auto-preset Press the or button to select auto-preset. button. Move on to setting of auto-preset.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 8] Auto-preset completed
Press the button during measurement mode to set the pressure. Then press the button again to change the set pressure, while the display is flashing.
Auto-preset When auto-preset is selected in function selection mode, the set pressure can be calculated and stored from a measured pressure value. The set value is automatically optimized by repeated pressure changes to the Pressure switch. 1, Selection of auto-preset OUT1 Press the button in measurement mode to display "AP1". (If OUT1 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to move to "AP2"). 2, Preparation of OUT1 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT1 is to be set. 3, Setting of auto-preset value of OUT1 Press the button to display "A1L". After measurement starts, operate the device and change the pressure. When the pressure change is detected, "A1H" will appear automatically, and so continue to operate the device. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while A1L is displayed, measurement is stopped and AP2 will appear). 4, Selection of auto-preset OUT2 Press the button to set "P_1" and "H_1" ("n_1" and "H_1" for reversed mode) and display "AP2". (If OUT2 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer return to measurement mode). 5, Preparation and setting of OUT2 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT2 is to be set, and perform the setting of OUT2 in the same way as for OUT1. After "A2L" is displayed and measurements starts, the pressure change will be detected, and "A2H" will appear automatically. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer when "A2L" is displayed, measurement is stopped and the display will return to measurement mode). 6, Completion of setting Press the button to set "P_2" and "H_2" ("n_2" and "H_2" for reversed mode) and complete auto-preset mode. After that, the display will return to measurement mode. The set values for OUT1 are displayed in auto-preset mode as follows: Normal output Reversed output P_1 = A - (A - B)/4 n_1 = B + (A - B)/4 H_1 = (A - B)/2 H_1 = (A B )/2 The set values of OUT2 become as follows "_", i.e. "P_2", "n_2" and "H_2".
A = Max. pressure B = Min. pressure
[F 9] Power saving mode

Power saving mode is selectable. When the Pressure switch is left for 30 seconds with no key operation, it will enter power saving mode (the decimal point and indicator LED (only with the switch output ON) will flash during operation). <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 9]. Press the Setting of power saving mode [ECo] and the set value are displayed in turn. Press the or button to select power saving mode. button. Move on to setting of power saving mode.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 9] Power saving mode completed
In power saving mode, any key operation will return the normal display. If there is no key operation for 30 seconds, the display will return to power saving mode (only in measurement mode). In power saving mode, only the decimal points and indicator LEDs will flash (the LEDs flash only when the switch is ON).
: The indicator LEDs will flash when the switch is ON, but it is not synchronized with the output.
[F10] Security code

A security code can be selected, which must be entered to unlock the keys when the keys are locked. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F10]. Press the Setting of security code [Pin] and the set value are displayed in turn. Press the or button to select security code. button. Move on to setting of security code.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F10] Security code completed

If the security code is used, it becomes necessary to enter the security code to release the key lock. The security code can be decided optionally by the operator. The default setting is "000". Refer to page 42 for the security code input.

All functions can be set, one after the other. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F98]. Press the Setting of all functions [ALL] and the set value are displayed in turn. Press the or button to select all functions. button. Move on to setting of all functions.
[on] (used) selected [oFF] (unused) selected Press the set. button to After the change to [oFF] (unused), press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer.
Setting of each function 1
[F98] Setting of all functions completed
Measurement mode
1: Setting of functions Every time the Set using the button is pressed, the function steps in the Order of Function setting" on page 39. or buttons.
Refer to each section for further details of the setting.
Order of Function setting

Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Selection of display unit Select output mode (OUT1) Select reversed output (OUT1) Setting of pressure (OUT1) Setting of hysteresis (OUT1) Setting of display colour Select output mode (OUT2) Select reversed output (OUT2) Setting of pressure (OUT2) Setting of hysteresis (OUT2) Response time Grey wire function Auto-shift function Effective output Display resolution Fine adjustment of display value Initialization of fine adjustment of display value Auto-preset Power saving mode Security code All models All models All models All models All models All models Only for output types R, S, T, and V All models Output for types other than N and P Function Applicable model Model with unit selection function All models All models All models All models All models
Press the
Measurement mode
: Measurement mode will return from any setting by pressing the : Function that will be set by the return to measurement mode. button for 2 seconds or longer.

If the setting of the pressure switch becomes unknown, the default setting can be restored. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F98]. Press the Reset to the default setting Set the display [ON] by pressing the or button, then press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. button. Move on to reset to the default setting.
[oFF] (unused) selected Press the button to set
Other Settings
Peak/Bottom value display
The maximum (minimum) pressure from when the power was supplied to this moment is detected and updated. In peak/bottom display mode, this pressure is displayed. For peak display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the maximum pressure and "Hi" starts flashing, and is held. To release holding the display of the maximum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. For bottom display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the minimum pressure and "Lo" starts flashing and is held. To release holding the display of the minimum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while the pressure is being held, the maximum (minimum) valus are reset.
Zero Clear
The displayed value can be adjusted to zero when the measured pressure is within 10% of the span between atmospheric pressure and upper limit of rated pressure range, from the default value of pressure. (A tolerance range of 1% digit may apply due to individual product differences). and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer, to clear the display to 0. Press the The display will return to measurement mode automatically. For analogue output, the analogue output will be changed along with the display.
Key Lock
The key lock function is used to prevent errors occurring due to unintentional changes of the set values. If a button operation is performed while the key lock setting is ON, "LoC" is displayed for approximately 1 second. The set value can be displayed by pressing the button (It cannot be changed).
<Operation - Without security code input- > 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting "LoC" or "UnL" is displayed. (selecting or releasing the key lock is carried out in a similar way).
2, Press the
or
button to select key lock (or key unlock).
3, Press the
button to store the setting.
<Operation - With security code input- > Locking 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting UnL is displayed.
2, Press the
or
button to select keys lock LoC.
3, Press the Unlocking
button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. 1, Press the The current setting LoC is displayed.
2, Press the
or
button to select keys unlock UnL.
3, When the button is pressed, input of the security code will be requested. For how to enter the security code, refer to "How to input enter the security code" on page 42.
4, If the security code entered is correct, the display will change to UnL. Press any of the , or buttons to release the key lock and return to measurement mode. If the security code entered is incorrect, FAL will be displayed and the security code must be entered again. If an incorrect security code is entered three times, LoC is displayed and the display will return to measurement mode.
How to change the security code At the time of shipment, the security code is set to 000, but this can be changed to any number.
<Operation> 1, After the Key lock setting has been completed, perform the first three steps in the unlocking procedure (page 42). 2, After the security code has been entered and the display changes to UnL, press the buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. 000 is displayed and a new security code can now be entered. For how to enter the security code, refer to How to enter the security code. The new security code will be displayed. 3, After checking the security code is as required, press the The display will return to measurement mode. At this time, if the or button is pressed, any security code changes are lost, and the change of security code procedure must be repeated. and
button for 1 second or longer.
How to enter the security code The first digit will start flashing. Press the or button to select a value. button to set and the next digit will start flashing. Press the (If the button is pressed at the last digit, the first digit will start flashing again). After the setting is completed, press the button for 1 second or longer. (If a key operation is not performed for 30 seconds, while entering the security code, the measurement mode will return).
Maintenance
How to reset the product after a power cut or forcible de-energizing
The setting of the product will remain as it was before a power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that before a power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of whole installation before operating the product. If the installation is using accurate control, wait until the product has warmed up (approximately 10 to 15 minutes).

The following procedure can be used when the security code has been forgotten. <Operation> button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. Press the The current setting "UnL" or "LoC" is displayed.
Press the and Then, press the
: There will be no change to the display.
(at this time, if another operation is performed or no key operation is performed for 30 seconds, the display will return to measurement mode). Press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. The display will change to "000" and the security code change mode will return. Refer to "How to change the security code" (page 43) and select a new security code. The new security code will be displayed. Check the security code is as required, and press the The display will return to measurement mode. At this time, if the or button is pressed, any security code changes will be lost, and the change of security code procedure must be repeated. button for 1 second or longer.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Applicable Pressure switch: ZSE80(F)/ISE80(H) If the cause of the failure cannot be identified and normal operation can be recovered by replacement with a new Pressure switch, this indicates that the Pressure switch itself is faulty. Pressure switch damage can be caused by the operating environment (network construction, etc.), therefore contact SMC.
The Pressure switch does not operate correctly
The indicator LED is ON
Refer to Fault No.1
The indicator LED is OFF
The product is faulty
Yes No
The switch output is OFF The indicator LED is ON
Refer to Fault No.2
Refer to Fault No.1
Refer to Fault No.3 The switch output is chattering Refer to Fault No.4
Refer to Fault No.5
The indicator LED operates incorrectly
Analogue output is not provided (specified accuracy is not satisfied)
Refer to Fault No.6
An Error is displayed
Refer to Fault No.7
Refer to Fault No.8
Yes No
Refer to Fault No.9
Refer to Fault No.9
The display flashes
Refer to Fault No.10
Pressure display difference when using 2 or more pressure switches
The display accuracy does not satisfy the specifications The units cannot be changed
The product is loose
Faults and countermeasures

Fault No. Fault Output remains ON. Indicator LED remains ON. Output remains OFF. Indicator LED remains OFF. Output remains ON. Indicator LED works correctly. Possible cause Investigation method Countermeasure
(1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check the operation mode, hysteresis and output type. Incorrect pressure (hysteresis mode / window setting comparator mode, normal / reversed output) Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure Incorrect wiring Check the wiring of the output line. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check if PNP is used when NPN should have been selected, or the other way around. Check the wiring of the output line. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-).
(1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Reset the function settings.
Output remains OFF. Indicator LED works correctly.
Broken lead wire Product failure
Check if there is bending stress Correct the wiring conditions. applied to any parts of the lead wire. (adjust the tensile force and (bending radius and tensile force increase the bending radius). applied). Replace the product. Check the wiring. Check that the brown and blue wires Correct the wiring. are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the output wiring is loose (contact failure). (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check that the hysteresis range is not too narrow. (3) Check the response time set at initial setting. Check that the response time is not too short. (1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Increase the hysteresis. (3) Reset the function settings. Replace the product. Reset the pressure setting. Set the pressure setting value so it is not too close to the detected pressure.
Incorrect wiring
Switch output generates chattering. Incorrect settings
Product failure 5 Slow switch output response Check the pressure setting. Incorrect pressure Check that the detected pressure and the set pressure value are not setting the same or not too close.
Fault No.
Fault
Possible cause Incorrect wiring
Investigation method Check that the analogue output is connected to a load.
Analogue output is not provided. (specified accuracy is not satisfied.)
Non-compliance with the load specification
(1) Check that the correct load is connected. (2) Check that the impedance of the Connect a suitable load. input equipment (A/D transformer) is suitable. Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy after 10 minutes warm up time. After energizing, the display and output can drift. For detecting fine pressures, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product.
Product failure
(1) Check that the switch output load current is not more than 80 mA. (1)(2) Connect the load as (2) Check that the connected load specified. satisfies the specifications, and (3) Use a relay with a surge check the load for short circuits. voltage suppressor or Over current to the (3) Check that any relay is take measures to prevent output connected with a surge voltage noise. (Er1, Er2) suppressor. (4) Separate the wiring route (4) Check if the wiring is not in the from any high voltage same route as (or bundled cable or power cable. together with) a high voltage cable or power cable. An over current error (Er1, Er2) is (1) Check that there is no noise displayed. interference such as static Incorrect operation electricity, and check for noise of the internal data System error sources. of the Pressure (Er0, Er4, Er6 or (2) Check that the power supply switch Er7) is displayed. voltage is within the range 12 to (Er0, Er4, Er6,Er7) The display 24 VDC 10%. shows "HHH". The display shows "LLL". Residual pressure error (Er3) is displayed. Applied pressure is over the upper limit (HHH). (1) Remove the noise and the noise source (or take measures to prevent noise interference), and reset the product, or turn off the power supply and turn it on again. (2) Supply a correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
(1) Adjust the pressure within (1) Check that the pressure is not the set pressure range. above the upper limit of the set (2) Take measures to prevent pressure range. foreign matter from (2) Check that foreign matter has not entering the piping. entered the piping. (1) Adjust the pressure within (1) Check that the pressure is not the set pressure range. below the lower limit of the set (2) Take measures to prevent pressure range. foreign matter from (2) Check that foreign matter has not entering the piping. entered the piping. Check that during the zero clear operation, pressure above 10%F.S. Return the applied pressure (from atmospheric pressure to the to atmospheric pressure, and upper limit of rated pressure) of retry the zero clear operation. atmospheric pressure was not applied. Replace the product.
Applied pressure is under the lower limit (LLL).
Pressure is not atmospheric pressure at zero-clear operation (Er3) Product failure
Fault No.
Fault
Investigation method Check if the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Countermeasure Supply the correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Displayed value fluctuates.
Incorrect wiring
Check the wiring to the power supply. Check if the brown and blue wires are Correct the wiring. connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and if the output line is about to come off (contact failure). If the fluctuation is not acceptable, the pressure switch display resolution can be changed. Supply the correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Reset the function settings.
Factory pressure Check if the factory pressure has change changed. Check that the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check if the power saving mode is selected. Check the power supply wiring. Check that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and that the output wiring is not loose (contact failure).
Incorrect power supply Display turns OFF. 9 Part of the display is missing. Power saving mode
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Product failure The peak / bottom value display mode is selected. Check if the peak value or bottom value display mode has been selected. (1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire.
Replace the product. Turn off the peak / bottom value display mode if not required. (1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring conditions (reduce the tensile force and increase the bending radius). Use the fine adjustment mode to adjust the display if the dispersion is within the display accuracy range. Replace the product.
10
Display is flashing.
Wiring failure
11
Pressure display difference when using 2 or more Pressure switches.
Dispersion within Check if the dispersion is within the the display display accuracy range. accuracy range Product failure
Fault No.
Fault
Possible cause
Countermeasure Install a 5 m filter to prevent foreign matter from entering the pressure port. Also, clean the filter regularly to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the piping. If an excessive tightening torque is applied, the mounting bracket, screws or the product may be damaged. After energizing, the display and output can drift. For detecting fine pressures, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product. "M" in the part number means that the units cannot be changed. (kPaMPa can be selected)
Foreign matter
12
The pressure display accuracy Air and fluid leakage does not satisfy the specifications.
Check if air or fluid are leaking from the piping.
Insufficient warm-up time Product failure
Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy after 10 minutes warm up time.
13
Improper model selection (selection of model "without unit selection function")
Check if there is an "-M" at the end of the part number printed on the product
Product failure 14 The buttons cannot Key lock mode be operated. Product failure The product is loose. Incorrect installation Product failure
Replace the product. Check if the key lock mode is turned on. Turn off the key lock mode. Replace the product. Check that the panel mount adapter and the product are correctly assembled. Mount the product on the panel correctly. Replace the product. Rework the piping. If an excessive tightening torque is applied, the mounting bracket, screws or the product may be damaged. Replace the product. (1) Check the set pressure (hysteresis) (2) Check the response time (1) Check the pressure setting. (2) Reset the function settings.
15
16
Air or fluid leakage
Product failure Pressure source fluctuation, small hysteresis or the response time is too short. Incorrect wiring or broken lead wire Product failure
17
The operation is unstable. (chattering)
(1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring (1) Check the power supply wiring. conditions (reduce the (2) Check if there is bending stress tensile force and increase applied to any parts of the lead wire. the bending radius). Replace the product.
Error indication
Error Name Over current Error Error Display Error Type Troubleshooting Method
Turn the power off and remove the The switch output load current is more than cause of the over current. 80 mA. Then turn the power on. During zero clear operation, pressure above 10% of the span between atmospheric pressure and upper limit of rated pressure has been applied. After 1 second, the mode will return to measurement mode. The zero clear range can vary 1 digit with individual product differences. Pressure has exceeded the upper limit of the set pressure range. Pressure has exceeded the lower limit of the set pressure range. The measured pressure at auto-shift input exceeded the set pressure range.
automatically.
Pressurizing Error
Auto-shift Error
Auto-shift input signal is invalid. Check the connected equipment : After 1 second, measurement mode will return and correct the signal.
System Error
Specifications
Specifications
Model No. Rated pressure range Set pressure range Withstand pressure ISE80 ISE80H (positive pressure) (positive pressure) -0.1 to 1 MPa 2 MPa -0.1 to 2 MPa 4 MPa 0.001 MPa (1.999 MPa) 0.01 MPa (2.00 to 2.20 MPa) -0.105 to 1.1 MPa -0.105 to 2.2 MPa ZSE80 (vacuum) 0 to 101 kPa 10 to 111 kPa ZSE80F (compound) -100 to 100 kPa -110 to 110 kPa
500 kPa
Setting and display resolution
0.001 MPa
0.1 kPa
Port material Fluid Connection port Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection Repeatability Hysteresis Hysteresis mode Window comparator mode Voltage Output voltage output Output impedance Analogue output Current output Load impedance Output current
Pressure sensor: SUS630, Fitting: SUS304 Fluid which has no corrosive effect on SUS630, SUS304 R1/4, NPT1/4, G1/4, URJ1/4, TSJ1/4, Rc1/8 Piping direction: Rear or Bottom 12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% or less (protected against reverse connection) 45 mA or less NPN1 output, NPN2 output, PNP1 output, PNP2 output 80 mA 28 V (NPN output) 1 V or less (80 mA load current) 2.5 ms (with anti-chatter function: 20, 100, 500, 1000, 2000 ms selectable) Provided 0.2% F.S. 1 digit 0 to variable 0.8 to 5V 0.6 to 5 V 2.5% F.S. 2.5% F.S. Linearity: 1% F.S. Linearity: 1% F.S. Approx. 1 k 3.2 to 20 mA 2.4 to 20 mA 2.5% F.S. 2.5% F.S. Linearity: 1% F.S. Linearity: 1% F.S. 4 to 20 mA 2.5%F.S. Linearity: 1% F.S. 1 to 5V 2.5% F.S. Linearity: 1% F.S.
Max. load impedance: 300 (power supply voltage of 12 V) : 600 (power supply voltage of 24 V) Min. load impedance: 50 Non-voltage input (reed or solid state), Low level 0.4 V or less, input times 5 ms or more 3 1/2 digits, 7-segment display, dual-colour display (red/green) 2% F.S. 1 digit (ambient temperature 25 3 oC) OUT1/OUT2: ON when LED is ON (Orange) Anti-chatter function, Zero clear, Key lock, Auto pre-set, Display unit selection, Power saving mode, Auto shift
Auto shift input Display Display accuracy Indicator LED Functions

: G1/4 is connected to the back only.
Model No. Enclosure Ambient temperature Environment Ambient humidity Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Temperature characteristic
ISE80 ISE80H (positive pressure) (positive pressure) IP65
ZSE80 (vacuum)
ZSE80F (compound)
Operation: 0 to 50 oC, Storage: -10 to 60 oC (No condensation or freezing) Operation, Storage: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation) 250 VAC for 1 minute Between wires and case 2 M or more (50 VDC by megameter) Between wires and case 3% F.S. (25 C Ambient temperature range)) Oil resistant vinyl cabtyre cable 3 cores (N.P) 3.5, 2 m 4 cores (A.B) Sectional area of conductor: 0.15 mm2 (AWG26) 5 cores (R.T.S.V) Outside diameter of insulator: 0.95 mm CE UL/CSA RoHS
Lead wire
Standard
Model No. Port size Mass (Bottom ported) Mass (Rear ported) Leakage 02 R1/4 117 g 89 g N02 NPT1/4 118 g 90 g
-5 3
F02 G1/4 86 g
C01 Rc1/8 114 g 86 g
A2 URJ1/4 120 g 92 g 1x10

-10
B2 TSJ1/4 111 g 83 g Pam /s

3
1x10 Pam /s
Analogue output
Range Vacuum Compound Positive pressure
Rated pressure range 0.0 to -101.0 kPa -100.0 to 100.0 kPa -0.100 to 1.000 MPa -0.100 to 2.00 MPa
A -0.1 MPa -0.1 MPa
B 0 -100 kPa 0 0
C -101.0 kPa 100 kPa 1 MPa 2 Mpa
: Analogue output is 0.8 [V] or 3.2 [mA] at the pressure A.
Dimensions
Z/ISE80-02
Z/ISE80-02L
Z/ISE80-N02
Z/ISE80-N02L
Z/ISE80-F02
Z/ISE80-C01
Z/ISE80-C01L
Z/ISE80-A2
Z/ISE80-A2L
Z/ISE80-B2
Z/ISE80-B2L
Revision history A: Revision B: Modified errors in text.
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2008-2011 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved No.PS##-OMM0003-B
No.PS##-OML0003-C
PRODUCT NAME

ZSE30A(F) ISE30A
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model Indication and How to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and Installation Installation Piping Wiring Pressure Setting Measurement mode Function Setting Function selection mode Default setting F0 Unit selection function F1 Setting of OUT1 F2 Setting of OUT2 F3 Response time F4 Display resolution F5 Auto-preset function F6 Fine adjustment of display value F7 Power saving mode F8 Security code Special function setting F90 Setting of all functions F97 Copy function F98 Check of output F99 Reset to default settings Other Settings Maintenance If the security code is forgotten Troubleshooting Specifications Dimensions 2 8 10 11 14 14 17 18 21 21 24 24 24 26 27 30 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 37 39 41 43 44 47 48 49 57 59
-1No.PS##-OML0003-C
Safety Instructions
Warning
-2No.PS##-OML0003-C
Caution


1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered. 2) Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
-3No.PS##-OML0003-C
Operator
Safety Instructions
Warning



Caution
-4No.PS##-OML0003-C
NOTE
*Product specifications The direct current power supply to combine should be UL approved as follows.
mark on the body.




Product handling
*Installation Tighten to the specified tightening torque.
-5No.PS##-OML0003-C

If the entering of foreign material to the fluid is possible, install and pipe the filter or the mist separator to the inlet to avoid failure and malfunction. *Wiring Do not pull the lead wires.
Wire correctly.


When analogue output is used, install a noise filter (line noise filter, ferrite element, etc.) between the switch-mode power supply and this product. *Environment Do not use the product in area that is exposed to corrosive gases, chemicals, sea water, water or steam.

-6No.PS##-OML0003-C

The product is CE marked, but not immune to lightning strikes. Take measures against lightning strikes in the system. Mount the product in a place that is not exposed to vibration or impact.



The fluid and ambient temperatures should be 0 to 50 C. Operation under low temperature (5 C or less) leads to cause damage or operation failure due to frozen moist in the fluid or air. Protection against freezing is necessary. Air dryer is recommended for elimination of drain and water. Avoid sudden temperature change even within specified temperature.

*Adjustment and Operation Turn the power on after connecting a load.



There will be a drift on the display and the analogue output of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on, within 10 minutes.


*Maintenance Turn off the power supply, stop the supplied air, exhaust the residual pressure and verify the release of air before performing maintenance.


-7No.PS##-OML0003-C
-8No.PS##-OML0003-C

If an accessory is required independently, order with the following part number.
Description Bracket A Bracket B Bracket C Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Front protective cover Lead wire with connector Lead wire with connector Lead wire with connector + connector cover Lead wire with connector + connector cover Lead wire with connector for copy function Lead wire with connector unit for copy function One-touch fitting 4 mm straight One-touch fitting 6 mm straight One-touch fitting 1/4 inch straight One-touch fitting 4 mm elbow One-touch fitting 6 mm elbow One-touch fitting 1/4 inch elbow Part number ZS-38-A1 ZS-38-A2 ZS-38-A3 ZS-27-C ZS-27-D ZS-27-01 ZS-38-3L ZS-38-4L ZS-38-3G ZS-38-4G ZS-38-5L ZS-38-U ZS-38-C4H ZS-38-C6H ZS-38-N7H ZS-38-C4L ZS-38-C6L ZS-38-N7L Remarks Mounting screw (M3x5L, 2 pcs) Mounting screw (M3x5L, 2 pcs) Mounting screw (M3x5L, 2 pcs) Mounting screw (M3x8L, 2 pcs) Mounting screw (M3x8L, 2 pcs) 3 cores for 1 output, 2 m 4 cores for 2 outputs, 2 m 3 cores for 1 output, 2 m 4 cores for 2 outputs, 2 m 3 cores (for copy function), 1 m for copy function (10 slaves max) O-ring and one-touch clip included O-ring and one-touch clip included O-ring and one-touch clip included O-ring and one-touch clip included O-ring and one-touch clip included O-ring and one-touch clip included
-9No.PS##-OML0003-C

Indicator LED (Green OUT1 and Red OUT2): Displays the switch output condition. LCD display: Displays the current status of pressure, setting mode, selected indication unit and error code. Four display modes can be selected: display always in red or green, or display changing from green to red, or red to green, according to the output status. button: Selects the mode or increases the ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the peak display mode. button: Selects the mode or decreases the ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the bottom display mode. button: Press this button to change to another mode and to set a value. Unit indication: Displays the unit currently selected. (only for kPa and MPa unit indication).
-10No.PS##-OML0003-C

Terms 2 7 A 2-colour display 7-segment display Analogue current output Analogue output function Analogue voltage output Meaning 2 colours are used to indicate a value, which change according to the output status. When "8" is shown on the display. It is called 7-segment because 8 consists of 7 pieces of "- (segments)". Refer to "Analogue output (function)". A function to output the voltage or current in proportion to the pressure. Refer to "Analogue output (function)". A function to automatically set up the pressure by having equipment hold and release a workpiece via vacuum adsorption. This function is used in an application where vacuum adsorption of a workpiece is confirmed by a Pressure switch. Displays the minimum pressure reached up to that moment. The problem of the switch output turning ON and OFF repeatedly around the set value at high frequency due to the effect of pulsation. A function to delay the response time of switch output in order to prevent chattering. A function to copy a pressure setting value and function setting (excluding fine adjustment of display value). Shows how precisely the pressure can be displayed or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1kPa, e.g., 1, 2, 3, , 99, 100. With the self-diagnostic function of the Pressure switch, this indicates that there is an error which could cause a switch failure. Refer to "Fine adjustment of display value".
Auto preset
B C
Bottom value display Chattering Chattering prevention function Copy function
Error indication Fine adjustment mode
A displayed pressure value can be adjusted within the range of 5%R.D. (5% of the displayed value). It is used if a true pressure value is known or to Fine adjustment of display value correct the difference of a displayed value of the measurement equipment nearby which measures the same pressure. F.S. (full span/full scale) Abbreviation for full span or full scale; this means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. For example, when the output voltage is 1 to 5[V], the F.S. will be 5-1 = 4[V]. (Ref: 1%F.S. = 4 0.01 = 0.04[V]) This is a mode in which each function is set up, and is a separate menu from the pressure setup. If the setting needs to be changed, "F*", each item can be set up. The items to be set up are: display colour, operation mode, output type, response time, display resolution, fine adjustment of display value, auto preset, power-saving mode and security code number. The difference between the pressure switch ON and OFF points, used to prevent chattering. Refer to "List of output modes" on page 29. The deviation between displayed pressure value and the true pressure. The colour of the digital display. There are four choices: normally green, normally red, green (off) to red (on), and red (off) to green (on).
Indication accuracy Indication colour
Terms I Insulation resistance
Meaning Insulation resistance of the product itself. The resistance between an electricical circuit and the pressure switch body. How fine the rated pressure range can be displayed (example: If a product for 0 to 1 MPa can display pressure by 0.001 MPa, the display resolution is 1/1000.) The LED that turns on when the switch output is on. The unit of pressure used on the display. A function that locks the setting buttons so that no accidental setting changes can be made. Refer to "Max. load impedance". Manual pressure set up without using auto preset. This term is used to distinguish from the pressure set up using auto preset. A Pressure switch whose settings are copied when using the copy function. The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output wire of the NPN output. The maximum current available to the output wire of the switch output. The maximum (minimum) load (resistance value and impedance) which can be connected to the output (output wire) of the analogue current output. The condition in which the pressure is detected and displayed and the switch output is operating. Refer to "digit". The switch output operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure equal to or greater than the set value is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it is the operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure is within the switch output range (P1L to P1H or P2L to P2H). (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 29). The switch output which uses the NPN transistor for output. There are two choices, hysteresis mode and window comparator mode. The resistance value of a component between the voltage output element and the analogue voltage output. It is indicated as a resistance value which is converted in accordance with the condition in which resistance is directly connected to the voltage output element. There may be an error in the output voltage depending on this output impedance and the input impedance of customers' equipment. (example: If the Pressure switch with output impedance of 1 k is connected to the A/D converter to detect the analogue output of 5 V, the detected voltage by the A/D converter becomes 5(V) 1(M)/(1(k) + 1(M)) 4.995(V), and there is an error of approximate 0.005 V). The operation type of the switch output. Either normal output or reversed output can be selected. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 29). Displays the maximum pressure reached up to that moment. The size of the port on the switch body with which a device can be connected. The switch output that uses the PNP transistor for output.
Indication resolution Indicator LED Indication unit K L M Key lock (function) Load impedance Manual set up Master Pressure switch Max. applied voltage Max. load current Max. (Min.) load impedance Measurement mode Min. setting unit N Normal output
NPN (open collector) output O Operating mode
Output impedance
Output type P Peak value display Piping-port size PNP (open collector) output
Terms P Power saving mode Pressure-sensing part Pressure setting Proof pressure R Rated pressure range
Meaning The condition in which the display is turned off to reduce current consumption. The pressure-detecting part of a pressure-detecting element. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off. The pressure beyond which the Pressure switch will be damaged. The pressure range in which the Pressure switch meets the specifications. Values outside of this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot be guaranteed to meet the product specifications. The value currently displayed. For example, when the displayed value is 1.000, 5%R.D. will be 0.05, which is 5% of 1.000, while for a displayed value of 0.800 it will be 0.04. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes. The difference between the ideal ON voltage and the actual voltage when the switch output is on. It depends on the load current and ideally should be "0". Refer to "Indication resolution". The elapsed time until the ON-OFF output begins operating, since the pressure supplied to the Pressure switch has reached the set value. Generally, the shorter the response time, the better the performance. The switch output operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure equal to or less than the set value is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it indicates the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure is outside the switch output range (n1L to n1H or n2L to n2H). (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 29.) A type of chattering. Refer to "Function selection mode". The pressure range within which the switch output can be set. A Pressure switch whose settings are copied to when using the copy function. Alternatively called "ON-OFF output". Function to change the unit in which the value of pressure is displayed. Only a product with this function can change the unit. A product with Unit selection function cannot be purchased if it is used within Japan. Pressure is indicated only by SI units in Japan. The part of the Pressure switch which is in contact with the detected fluid, such as a pressure sensor, seal, or fitting. An output type which holds the output when the pressure is within a certain range. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 29). The ability to withstand a voltage applied between an electrical circuit and the body. If more voltage is applied to the product, the product may be damaged. (voltage mentioned here is not power voltage to activate the product). The function which can adjust the displayed pressure value to "0".
R.D.
Reversed output
Ripple S Setting of function Setting pressure range Slave Pressure switch Switch output U Unit selection function

Installation
: The required tightening torque of the piping port is 7 to 9 Nm. The required tightening torque of the mounting bracket screws is 0.5 to 0.7 Nm.
Fix the bracket to the Pressure switch with the set screws M35 L (2 pcs) supplied.
Bracket A (Model: ZS-38-A1)
Bracket B (Model: ZS-38-A2)
Bracket C (Model: ZS-38-A3)
: The bracket A/B/C can be mounted in 4 ways.

Fix the panel mount adapter to the Pressure switch with the set screws M38 L (2 pcs) supplied.
Panel mount adapter (Model: ZS-27-C) Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover (Model: ZS-27-D)
: The panel mount adapter can be rotated by 90 degrees for mounting.
Note when removing the switch The Pressure switch with panel mount adapter can be removed from the installation by removing 2 screws and releasing the hooks at the sides, as illustrated. Take care not to damage the Pressure switch and panel mount adapter.
Piping
1. Cut the tube end perpendicular. 2. Hold the tube and insert it into the One-touch fitting slowly until it bottoms out.
Warning
Do not use the Pressure switch in a place where electrical static charge will be a problem.
It can cause an error and damage to the system. Allow sufficient tube length to prevent twist and tensile or moment loads from being applied to the fitting or tube. When using a tube manufactured by a company other than SMC, check that its outside diameter tolerance satisfies the following values: 1) Nylon tube: 0.1 mm maximum 2) Soft nylon tube: 0.1 mm maximum 3) Polyurethane tube: +0.15 mm/-2 mm maximum
Wiring
Connection
Connections should only be made with the power supply turned off. Use a separate route for the Pressure switch wiring and any power or high voltage wiring. Otherwise, malfunction may result due to noise. Ensure that the FG terminal is connected to ground when using a commercially available switch-mode power supply. When a switch-mode power supply is connected to the product, switching noise will be superimposed and the product specification can no longer be met. This can be prevented by inserting a noise filter, such as a line noise filter and ferrite core, between the switch-mode power supply and the product, or by using a series power supply instead of a switch-mode power supply.
Connector
Connecting/Disconnecting When mounting the connector, insert it straight into the socket, holding the lever and connector body, and push the connector until the lever hooks into the housing, and locks. When removing the connector, press down the lever to release the hook from the housing and pull the connector straight out.
Connector pin numbers
Internal circuit and wiring example Z/ISE30A(F)Output specification
-N NPN open collector 1 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-P PNP open collector 1 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-A NPN open collector 2 outputs Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-B PNP open collector 2 outputs Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less
-C NPN open collector 1 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less Analogue voltage output Output impedance approx. 1 k
-D NPN open collector 1 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less Analogue current output Max. load impedance 300 at 12 V power supply voltage 600 at 24 V power supply voltage Min. load impedance 50
-E PNP open collector 1 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less Analogue voltage output Output impedance approx. 1 k
-F PNP open collector 1 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 1 V or less Analogue current output Max. load impedance 300 at 12 V power supply voltage 600 at 24 V power supply voltage Min. load impedance 50
Pressure Setting
Measurement mode
Setting the ON and OFF points of the Pressure switch. Operation When the pressure exceeds a set point, the Pressure switch will be turned ON. When the pressure falls below the set point by the amount of hysteresis or more, the Pressure switch will be turned OFF. The default setting of the output set value is the central value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. If this condition, shown below, is acceptable, then keep these settings.
3, Press the or button to change the set value. The button is to increase and the button is to decrease. Press the set value. button once to increase by one digit, and press it continuously to keep increasing the
Press the set value.
button once to decrease by one digit, and press it continuously to keep decreasing the
4, Press the button to finish the setting. For models with 2 outputs, [P_2] or [n_2] will be displayed. Set as above. The Pressure switch operates within a set pressure range (from P1L to P1H) during window comparator mode. Set P1L (switch lower limit) and P1H (switch upper limit) with the setting procedure above. (When reversed output is selected, [n1L] and [n1H] are displayed.) Zero clear of Display The display is reset to zero when the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second. For the first operation, always perform zero clear with no pressure applied.
Function Setting
: Some functions are not available depending on part number. All functions are displayed with [F
description. If a function is not available, the function is displayed as [---].
Default setting
Unit specification Nil or M P Model ISE30A ZSE30A(F) ISE30A ZSE30A(F)
See page 26
See page 27
Description Default setting Hysteresis mode Normal output ISE30A: 0.500 MPa ZSE30A: -50.5 kPa ZSE30AF: 50.0 kPa ISE30A: 0.050 MPa ZSE30A: 5.1 kPa ZSE30AF: 5.0 kPa ON: Green OFF: Red
Select hysteresis mode or window comparator mode. Select reversed output. Set the ON or OFF point of the switch output
Hysteresis
Display colour
Select the display colour.
[F 2] Setting of OUT2 See page 30 Same setting as for [F 1] OUT1. The display colour is linked to the setting of OUT1, and can not be set for OUT2. Other parameter settings
Item [F 3] Response time [F 4] Display resolution [F 5] Auto-preset function [F 6] Fine adjustment of display value [F 7] Power saving mode [F 8] Security code [F90] Setting of all functions [F97] Copy function [F98] Check of output [F99] Reset to the default setting Page page 30 page 31 page 32 page 34 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 39 page 41 page 43 Default setting 2.5 ms 1000-split Manual 0% OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal OFF

Only the product with Unit selection function can be set. The displayed unit can be changed, and depends on the pressure range. (kPa/MPa units are available when the product does not have the unit selection function). <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 0]. Press the Select the Display Unit Press the unit. or button to select the display button. Move on to select the display unit.
Press the
button to set.

Unit MPa kPa kgf/cm bar psi InHg mmHg
2
ZSE30AF 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1
ZSE30A 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1
ISE30A 0.001 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 -
Set output method of OUT1. The output turns on when the pressure exceeds the set value. The default setting of the output set value is the central value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. The display colour depends on the condition of OUT1. The default setting of the display colour is as follows: green display when the output is ON and red display when the output is OFF. For the operation of each setting, refer to "List of output modes" on page 29. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 1]. Press the Select output mode Press the or button to select output mode. button. Move on to setting of output mode.
Press the Select reversed output Press the output. or
button to set.
button to select reversed
Press the Pressure Setting
button to set.
Set the pressure based on the setting procedure on page 22. "P" becomes "n" when reversed output is selected. ([P_1] [n_1]) Hysteresis mode: [P_1] Window comparator mode: [P1L][P1H] Press the button to set. Move on to setting of hysteresis.
Setting of Hysteresis Press the or button to select hysteresis.
Press the Selection of display colour Press the or
button to set.
button to select display colour.
Press the
button to set.
1: The selected parameter becomes effective after pressing the
button. button for 2 seconds or longer.
Set output method of OUT2. The display colour is linked to the setting of OUT1, and can not be set for OUT2 <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 2]. Press the button Moves on to setting of output mode
Set [F 2] based on [F 1] setting of OUT1 (page 27 to 29)
: If there is only 1 output or the analogue output is used, the display indicates [---], and this function cannot be set.
[F 3] Response time
Press the
button to set.
[F 4] Display resolution
This function is used to change the pressure display resolution. This can be used to prevent the digits from flickering on the display. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 4]. Press the Setting of display resolution Press the resolution. or button to select display button. Move on to setting of display resolution.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 4] Display resolution completed
: Not selectable depending on the selected display units.
The display resolution selectable unit is MPa, kPa (for ZSE only), kgf/cm2, bar, psi and inHg. 2 The units kgf/cm , bar, psi and inHg are selectable only for models with the unit selection function. See [F 0] Unit selection function on page 26.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 5] Auto-preset completed
Press the button during measurement mode to set the pressure. Then press the button again to change the pressure setting, while the display is flashing.
Auto-preset When auto-preset is selected in function selection mode, the set pressure can be calculated and stored from a measured pressure value. The set value is automatically optimized by repeating the suction and release of the workpiece during setting. 1, Selection of auto-preset OUT1 Press the button in measurement mode to display "AP1". (If OUT1 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to move to "AP2"). 2, Preparation of OUT1 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT1 is to be set. 3, Setting of auto-preset value for OUT1 button to display "A1L". Press the After measurement starts, operate the device and change the pressure. When the pressure change is detected, "A1H" will appear automatically, and so continue to operate the device. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while "A1L" is displayed, measurement is stopped and "AP2" will appear). 4, Selection of auto-preset OUT2 Press the button to set "P_1" and "H_1" ("n_1" and "H_1" for reversed mode) and display "AP2". and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to (If OUT2 does not need to be set, press the return to measurement mode). 5, Preparation and setting of OUT2 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT2 is to be set, and perform the setting of OUT2 in the same way as for OUT1. After "A2L" is displayed and measurement starts, the pressure change will be detected, and "A2H" will appear automatically. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer when "A2L" is displayed, measurement is stopped and the display will return to measurement mode). 6, Completion of setting button to set "P_2" and "H_2" ("n_2" and "H_2" for reversed output) and complete Press the auto-preset mode. After that, the display will return to measurement mode. The set values for OUT1 are displayed in auto-preset mode as follows: Normal output Reversed output P_1 = A-(A-B)/4 n_1 = B+(A-B)/4 A = Max. pressure H_1 = (A-B)/2 H_1 = (A-B)/2 B = Min. pressure The set values of OUT2 become as follows "_", i.e. "P_2", "n_2", "H_2". If this setting is not necessary, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.

This function is used to manually perform fine adjustment of the displayed pressure. It is adjustable within the range 5%R.D. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 6]. Press the button. Move on to setting of fine adjustment of display value.
Setting of fine adjustment of display value or Press the pressure value. button to change the set
Press the If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while [FSC] is displayed, the adjusted value is set.
button to set
Press the
button to set.
[F 7] Power saving mode

Power saving mode is selectable. When the Pressure switch is left for 30 seconds with no key operation, it will enter power saving mode. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 7]. Press the Setting of power saving mode Press the mode. or button to select power saving button. Move on to setting of power saving mode.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 7] Power saving mode completed
In power saving mode, any key operation will return the normal display. If there is no key operation for 30 seconds, the display will return to power saving mode (only in measurement mode).
In power saving mode, only the decimal points and indicator LEDs will flash (the LEDs flash only when the switch is ON).
: The indicator LEDs will flash when the switch is ON, but it is not synchronized with the output.
[F 8] Security code
A security code can be selected, which must be entered to unlock the keys when the keys are locked. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 8]. Press the Setting of security code Press the or button to select security code. button. Move on to setting of security code.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 8] Security code completed If the security code is used, it becomes necessary to enter the security code to release the key lock. The security code can be decided optionally by the operator. The default setting is "0000". Refer to page 45 for the security code input.

All functions can be set, one after the other. <Operation> Press the
or
button in function selection mode to display [F90]. Press the button. Move on to setting of all functions.
Setting of all functions Press the or button to select all functions.
[on] (used) selected [oFF] (unused) selected. Press the to set. button After the change to [oFF] (unused), press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer. Setting of each function 1
Measurement mode
1: Setting of functions Every time the Set using the button is pressed, the function steps in the order of Function setting on page 38. or buttons.
Refer to each section for further details of the setting.
Order of Function setting

Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Selection of display unit Select output mode (OUT1) Select reversed output (OUT1) Setting of pressure (OUT1) Setting of hysteresis (OUT1) Setting of display colour Select output mode (OUT2) Select reversed output (OUT2) Setting of pressure (OUT2) Setting of hysteresis (OUT2) Response time Display resolution Auto-preset function Fine adjustment of display value Power saving mode Security code All models All models All models All models All models All models
Function
Applicable model All models All models All models All models All models All models Only for the product with output specification of NPN2 and PNP2
: Measurement mode will return from any setting by pressing the : Function that will be set by the return to the measurement mode.
[F97] Copy function

The set values of pressure and functions (except for corrected value of fine adjustment of display value) can be copied. When the pressure range, output and unit specifications are the same, this function becomes available. The set value can be copied to up to 10 pressure switches simultaneously. <Connection> Connect the Pressure switches with the power supply turned off. Connect the FUNC terminals of the master Pressure switch and the slave Pressure switches, and then turn on the power supply. The master Pressure switch is the switch from which the setting is to be copied. The slave Pressure switch is the switch to which the setting is to be copied.
<Operation> Press the
or
Press the
button to set.
Press the
button to start copying. The master Pressure switch The slave Pressure switch Flashing (Green)
Sending/ Receiving
Flashing (Red)
Copy completed (Red) Press the button. The copy can be made continuously and the copy ready status can be held even if the power supply is turned off. (Green)
Press the
button.
To complete the copy function, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.
Setting of [F97] Copy function completed
: If the copy to the slave pressure switch is not completed, it is detected as a copy function sending/receiving error. Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to return to measurement mode. Then, check the wiring and specifications of the switch and retry the copy function.

Output from the switch can be confirmed. It can be selected to provide or not provide the output. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F98]. Press the Check of output Press the output. or button to select check of button. Move on to check of output.
If [F] (forcibly output) is selected If [A] (normal output) is selected, Press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button to set.
If OUT2 output is not provided, press the button to set after returning to [A] (normal output). Return to function selection mode.
If OUT2 output is provided, press the to set. button
Press the button to set after returning to [A] (normal output). Setting of [F98] Check of output completed
Press the button for 2 seconds or longer.
Measurement mode
: If the
button is pressed for 2 seconds or longer, the mode is returned to measurement mode regardless of the current mode.

If the setting of the pressure switch becomes unknown, the default setting can be restored. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F99]. Press the Reset to the default setting Set the display [ON] by pressing the or and buttons button, then press the simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. button. Move on to reset to the default setting.
[oFF] (unused) selected Press the button to set
Return to function selection mode. Setting of [F99] Reset to the default setting completed
Other Settings
The maximum (minimum) pressure from when the power was supplied to this moment is detected and updated. In peak/bottom display mode, this pressure is displayed. For peak display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the maximum pressure and "Hi" starts flashing, and is held. To release holding the display of the maximum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. For bottom display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the minimum pressure and "Lo" starts flashing, and is held. To release holding the display of the minimum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while the pressure is being held, the maximum (minimum) values are reset.
Zero clear
The displayed value can be adjusted to zero when the measured pressure is within 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) of the pressure, at the time of shipment from the factory. (A tolerance range of 1%F.S. may apply due to individual product differences). and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer, to clear the display to "0". Press the The display will return to measurement mode automatically.
Key lock
The key lock function is used to prevent errors occurring due to unintentional changes of the set values. If a button operation is performed while the key lock setting is ON, "LoC" is displayed for approximately 1 second. (When the button is pressed, the set pressure will be displayed following "LoC"). <Operation - Without security code input- > 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting "LoC" or "UnL" will be displayed. (Selecting or releasing the key lock is carried out in a similar way).
2, Press the
or
3, Press the
<Operation - With security code input- > Locking button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. 1, Press the The current setting UnL is displayed.
2, Press the
or
3, Press the
Unlocking 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting LoC is displayed.
2, Press the
or
button is pressed, input of the security code will be requested. 3, When the For how to enter the security code, refer to "How to enter the security code" on page 46.
4, If the security code entered is correct, the display will change to UnL. Press any of the , or buttons to release the key lock and return to measurement mode. If the security code entered is incorrect, FAL will be displayed and the security code must be entered again. If an incorrect security code is entered three times, LoC is be displayed and the display will return to measurement mode.
How to change the security code At the time of shipment, the security code is set to 0000, but this can be changed to any number. <Operation> 1, After the key lock setting has been completed, perform the first three steps in the unlocking procedure (page 45). 2, After the security code has been entered and the display changes to UnL, press the buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. 0000 is displayed and a new security code can now be entered. For how to enter the security code, refer to "How to enter the security code". The new security code will be displayed. and
3, After checking the security code is as required, press the button for 1 second or longer. The display will return to measurement mode. At this time, if the or button is pressed, any security code changes are lost, and the change of security code procedure must be repeated.
How to enter the security code The first digit will start flashing. Press the or button to select a value. Press the button to set and the next digit will start flashing. (If the button is pressed at the last digit, the first digit will start flashing again). After the setting is completed, press the button for 1 second or longer. (If a key operation is not performed for 30 seconds while entering the security code, the measurement mode will return).
Maintenance
How to reset the product after a power cut or forcible de-energizing The setting of the product will be retained as it was before a power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that before a power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of the whole installation before operating the product. If the installation is using accurate control, wait until the product has warmed up (approximately 10 to 15 minutes). Replacement of one-touch fitting The one-touch fitting has a cassette mechanism which can be replaced. Assembly should be performed after turning the power off, stopping the supplied fluid, exhausting the fluid within the piping, and ensuring the release to atmosphere. The one-touch fitting is held by a one-touch clip inserted as shown in the figure below. Remove the one-touch clip with a flat blade screwdriver, and remove the one-touch fitting. To mount the one-touch fitting, insert it to the bottom, then insert the one-touch clip. Take care not to damage the O-ring of the one-touch fitting. Supply pressure to the fitting slowly, and check if for leaks.

The following procedure can be used when the security code has been forgotten. <Operation> Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting "UnL" or "LoC" is displayed.
Press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. Then, press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer.
: There will be no change to the display.
(at this time, if another operation is performed or no key operation is performed for 30 seconds, the display will return to measurement mode). Press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. The display will change to "0000" and the security code change mode will return. Refer to "How to change the security code" (page 46) and select a new security code. The new security code will be displayed. Check the security code is as required, and press the The display will return to measurement mode. At this time, if the or button is pressed, any security code changes will be lost, and the change of security code procedure must be repeated. button for 1 second or longer.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Applicable Pressure switch: ZSE30A(F)/ISE30A If the cause of the failure cannot be identified and normal operation can be recovered by replacement with a new Pressure switch, this indicates that the Pressure switch itself is faulty. Pressure switch damage can be caused by the operating environment (network construction, etc.), therefore contact SMC.
The pressure switch does not operate correctly The Indicator LED is ON
Refer to Fault No.1
The Indicator LED is OFF
Yes No
The switch output is OFF The Indicator LED is ON
Refer to Fault No.2
The Indicator LED is OFF
Refer to Fault No.1
Refer to Fault No.3 The switch output is chattering Refer to Fault No.4
Refer to Fault No.5
Refer to Fault No.6
Refer to Fault No.7
Refer to Fault No.8
Yes No
Refer to Fault No.9
Refer to Fault No.9
The display flashes
Pressure display difference when using 2 or more pressure switches
The product Is loose
Copy function error
Not able to copy
Slave pressure switch does not complete copying

Fault No. Fault Output remains ON. Indicator LED remains ON. Output remains OFF. Indicator LED remains OFF. Output remains ON. Indicator LED works correctly. Possible cause Investigation method (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check the operation mode, hysteresis and output type. (hysteresis mode / window comparator mode, normal / reversed output) Countermeasure
Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure Incorrect wiring Check the wiring of the output. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check if PNP is used when NPN should have been selected, or the other way around. Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire. (bending radius and tensile force applied). Check the wiring of the output. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-).
Review the selected model (output type). Correct the wiring conditions. (adjust the tensile force and increase the bending radius). Replace the product.
Broken lead wire
Product failure Check the wiring. Check that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the output wiring is loose (contact failure). (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check that the hysteresis range is not too narrow. (3) Check the response time set at initial setting. Check that the response time is not too short.
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
(1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Increase the hysteresis. (3) Reset the function settings. Replace the product.
Product failure Slow switch output response Incorrect pressure setting Check the pressure setting. Check that the detected pressure and the set pressure value are not the same or not too close.
Reset the pressure setting. Set the pressure setting value so it is not too close to the detected pressure.
Fault No.
Fault
Investigation method Check that the analogue output is connected to a load. (1) Check that the correct load is connected. (2) Check that the impedance of the input equipment (A/D transformer) is suitable. Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy after 10 minutes warm up time.
Analogue output is not provided. (specified accuracy is not satisfied).
Non-compliance with the load specification.
Connect a suitable load.
After energizing, the display and output can drift. For detecting fine pressures, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product.
Product failure (1) Check that the switch output load current is not more than 80 mA. (2) Check that the connected load satisfies the specifications, and check the load for short circuits. (3) Check that any relay is connected with a surge voltage suppressor. (4) Check if the wiring is not in the same route as (or bundled together with) a high voltage cable or power cable. (1) Check that there is no noise interference such as static electricity, and check for noise sources. (2) Check that the power supply voltage is within the range 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Over current to the output (Er1, Er2)
(1)(2) Connect the load as specified. (3) Use a relay with a surge voltage suppressor or take measures to prevent noise. (4) Separate the wiring route from any high voltage cable or power cable. (1) Remove the noise and the noise source (or take measures to prevent noise interference), and reset the product, or turn off the power supply and turn it on again. (2) Supply a correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. (1) Adjust the pressure to within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from entering the piping. (1) Adjust the pressure to within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from entering the piping. Return the applied pressure to atmospheric pressure, and retry the zero clear operation. Replace the product.
An over current error (Er1, Er2) is displayed. System error (Er0, Er4, Er6, Er7, Er8 or Er9) is displayed. 7 The display shows "HHH". The display shows "LLL". Residual pressure error (Er3) is displayed.
Incorrect operation of the internal data of the Pressure switch (Er0, Er4, Er6, Er7, Er8, Er9)
Applied pressure is above the upper limit (HHH).
(1) Check that the pressure is not above the upper limit of the set pressure range. (2) Check that foreign matter has not entered the piping. (1) Check that the pressure is not below the lower limit of the set pressure range. (2) Check that foreign matter has not entered the piping. Check that during the zero clear operation, pressure above 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) was not applied.
Applied pressure is below the lower limit (LLL). Pressure is not atmospheric pressure at zero-clear operation (Er3) Product failure
Fault No.
Fault
Countermeasure
Check that the power supply voltage is Supply the correct voltage of within the range 12 to 24 VDC 10%. 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check the wiring to the power supply. Check that the brown and blue wires Correct the wiring. are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and that the output wiring is not loose (contact failure). If the fluctuation is not acceptable, the pressure switch display resolution can be changed. Supply the correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Reset the function settings.
Incorrect wiring
Factory pressure Check if the factory pressure has change changed. Check that the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check if the power saving mode is selected. Check the power supply wiring. Check that the brown and blue wires are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and that the output wiring is not loose (contact failure).
Incorrect power supply Display turns OFF. 9 Part of the display is missing. Power saving mode
Incorrect wiring
Correct the wiring.
Product failure The peak / bottom value display mode is selected. 10 Display is flashing. Wiring failure Check if the peak value or bottom value display mode has been selected.
Replace the product. Turn off the peak / bottom value display mode if not required. (1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring conditions (reduce the tensile force and increase the bending radius). Use the fine adjustment mode to adjust the display if the dispersion is within the display accuracy range. Replace the product.
(1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire.
11
Dispersion within the display accuracy range Product failure
Fault No.
Fault
Possible cause
Countermeasure Install a 5 m filter to prevent foreign matter from entering the pressure port. Also, clean the filter regularly to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the piping. If an excessive tightening torque is applied, the mounting bracket, screws or the product may be damaged. After energizing, the display and output can drift. For detecting fine pressures, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product.
Foreign matter
12
The pressure display accuracy does not satisfy the specifications.
Product failure
13
Improper model selection (selection of model without unit selection function")
"M" in the part number means that the units cannot be changed. Check if there is an "-M" at the end of (kPaMPa can be selected) the part number printed on the : The unit change function is product. not available in Japan due to
a new measurement law. : It is fixed to the SI unit "kPa", "MPa".
Product failure 14 The buttons cannot be operated. Key lock mode Product failure Incorrect installation Product failure Check that the panel mount adapter and the product are correctly assembled. Check if the key lock mode is turned on.
Replace the product. Turn off the key lock mode. Replace the product. Mount the product on the panel correctly. Replace the product. Rework the piping. If an excessive tightening torque is applied, the mounting bracket, screws or the product may be damaged. Replace the product. (1) Check the wiring connection at the FUNC terminal. (2) Check the power supply wiring. Correct the wiring. Replace the product.
15
The product is loose.
16
Product failure Copy function error Unable to copy Incorrect wiring Product failure
17
Fault No.
Fault
Possible cause
Investigation method (1) Check the wiring connection at the FUNC terminal. Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check the lead wire lengths.
Countermeasure (1) Correct the wiring. (2) The maximum transmitting distance of the copy function is 4 m. Shorten the lead wire to 4 m or less. Check the model numbers. Copying is available when the pressure range, output specification and units specification are identical. The number of connected products for which copying is possible is up to 10 pcs. Reduce the number to 10 pcs or less. Replace the product.
Incorrect wiring
18
Slave Pressure switch does not complete the copy function.
Improper model selected
The model number of the master Pressure switch and the slave Pressure switch are different from each other.
Too many pressure switches connected Product failure Pressure source fluctuation, small hysteresis or the response time is too short. 19 The operation is unstable. (chattering)
Check the number of connected slave Pressure switches.
(1) Check the set pressure (hysteresis) (2) Check the response time
(1) Check the pressure setting. (2) Reset the function settings. (1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring conditions (reduce the tensile force and increase the bending radius). Replace the product.
Incorrect wiring or broken lead wire
(1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire.
Product failure
Error indication
Error Name Over current Error Error Display Error Type The switch output load current is more than 80 mA. During zero clear operation, pressure above 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) has been applied. After 1 second, the mode will return to measurement mode. The zero clear range can vary 1%F.S. with individual product differences. Pressure has exceeded the upper limit of the set pressure range. Pressure has exceeded the lower limit of the set pressure range. Troubleshooting Method Turn the power off and remove the cause of the over current. Then turn the power on.
Pressurizing Error
Adjust the applied pressure to a level within the set pressure range.
System Error
Specifications
Specifications
Model No. Rated pressure range Set pressure range Withstand pressure Minimum display unit Applicable fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection Repeatability Hys teresis Hysteresis mode Window comparator mode Output Voltage Voltage (rated pressure range) output Linearity 2 Output impedance Output current (rated pressure range) ZSE30A (vacuum) 0.0 to -101.0 kPa 10.0 to -105.0 kPa 500 kPa 0.1 kPa ZSE30AF (compound) -100.0 to 100.0 kPa -105.0 to 105.0 kPa 500 kPa 0.1 kPa Air, inert gases and incombustible gases 12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% or less (protected against reverse connection) 40 mA or less NPN or PNP open collector output : 1 output NPN or PNP open collector output : 2 outputs (selectable) 80 mA 28 V (NPN output) 1 V or less (at 80 mA load current) 2.5 ms or less (with anti-chatter function: 20, 100, 500, 1000 or 2000 ms selected) Provided 0.2%F.S. 1 digit 0 to variable 1 1 to 5 V 2.5%F.S. 1%F.S. approx. 1 k 4 to 20 mA 2.5%F.S. 1%F.S. Max. load impedance: 300 (at power supply voltage of 12 VDC) 600 (at power supply voltage of 24 VDC) Min. load impedance: 50 4 digits, 7-segment, dual-colour display (red/green) 2%F.S. 1digit (at ambient temperature 253 C) LED is ON when output is ON OUT1: Green OUT2: Red IP40 Operation: 0 to 50 C, Storage: -10 to 60 C (no condensation or freezing) Operation, Storage: 35 to 85%RH (no condensation) 1000 VAC, 1 minute between terminals and case between terminals and case 50 M or more at 500 VDC 2.4 to 20 mA 2.5%F.S. 0.6 to 5 V 2.5%F.S. ISE30A (positive pressure) -0.100 to 1.000 MPa -0.105 to 1.050 MPa 1.5 MPa 0.001 MPa
Analogue output
Current Linearity output

3
Load impedance Display Display accuracy Indicator LED Environment Enclosure Ambient temperature range Ambient humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Temperature characteristics Lead wire Standard
2%F.S. (25 C reference) Oil resistant vinyl cabtyre cable 3 cores 3.5, 2 m 4 cores Sectional area of conductor: 0.15 mm2 (AWG26) Outside diameter of insulator: 1.0 mm CE, UL/CSA, RoHS
1: If the applied voltage fluctuates around the set value, the hysteresis must be set to more than the fluctuation width. Otherwise, chattering will occur. 2: If analogue voltage output is selected, the analogue current output cannot be selected. 3: If analogue current output is selected, the analogue voltage output cannot be selected.
Model No. Port size One-touch fitting straight type One-touch fitting elbow type Pressure sensing part C3602 (electroless nickel plating) O-ring: HNBR 81 g 01 R1/8 M50.8 N01 NPT1/8 M50.8 C4H 4 mm 5/32 inch C6H 6 mm Silicone N7H 1/4 inch C4L 4 mm 5/32 inch C6L 6 mm N7L 1/4 inch
Material of wetted parts
Piping port
PBT, POM, SUS304, C3604 (electroless nickel plating) O-ring: NBR
With lead wire and connector attached (3-core, 2 m) Weight With lead wire and connector attached (4-core, 2 m) Without lead wire and connector
70 g
71 g
73 g
75 g
73 g
75 g
85 g
74 g
75 g
77 g
79 g
77 g
79 g
43 g
32 g
33 g
35 g
37 g
35 g
37 g
Analogue output
Rated pressure range 0.0 to -101.0 kPa -100.0kPa to 100.0 kPa -0.100 to 1.000 MPa
A -0.1 MPa
B 0 -100 kPa 0
C -101 kPa 100 kPa 1 MPa
Dimensions
Body dimensions
01/N01 type
01: R1/8 N01: NPT1/8
C4H type
C4L type
One-touch fitting 4 mm, 5/32 inch straight
One-touch fitting 4 mm, 5/32 inch elbow
C6H type
C6L type
One-touch fitting 6 mm straight
One-touch fitting 6 mm elbow
N7H type
N7L type
One-touch fitting 1/4 inch straight
One-touch fitting 1/4 inch elbow
Mounting brackets Bracket A
Bracket B
Bracket C
Panel mount adapter
Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover
Revision history A: Modified errors in text. Add the bracket type C. B: Revision C: Modified errors in text.
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2008-2011 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved No.PS##-OML0003-B
No.PS##-OMM0005-C
PRODUCT NAME

ZSE10(F) ISE10
Table of Contents
Safety Instructions Model Indication and How to order Summary of Product parts Definition and terminology Mounting and Installation Installation Piping Wiring Internal circuit and wiring example Pressure Setting Measurement mode Function Setting Function selection mode 2 9 11 12 15 15 17 18 19 20 20 22 22 22 24 25 28 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 39 41 43 44 47 48 49 57 59
Default setting
F0 Unit selection function F1 Setting of OUT1 F2 Setting of OUT2 F3 Response time F4 Auto-preset F6 Fine adjustment of display value F11 Display resolution F80 Power saving mode F81 Security code F90 Setting of all functions F97 Copy function F98 Check of output F99 Reset to the default setting Other Settings Maintenance If the security code is forgotten Troubleshooting Specifications Dimensions
-1No.PS##-OMM0005-C
Safety Instructions
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications. Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results. The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its latest catalogue information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the equipment. 2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment. The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced. 3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed. 1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed. 2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products carefully. 3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction. 4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions. 1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight. 2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard specifications described in the product catalogue. 3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis. 4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical protective function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
-2No.PS##-OMM0005-C
Caution


1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered. 2) Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage incurred due to the failure of the product. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalogue for the particular products.
-3No.PS##-OMM0005-C
Operator
Safety Instructions
Warning



Caution
-4No.PS##-OMM0005-C
NOTE
Product specifications The direct current power supply to be used should be UL approved as follows.
mark on the body.




-5No.PS##-OMM0005-C
Product handling
The tightening torque of piping must be 1 Nm for M5 (This is equivalent to approximate 1/6 extra tightening after manual tightening.) and 7 to 9 Nm for R1/8 and NPT1/8. Exceeding this value can damage the piping. For piping of the Pressure switch, hold the piping with a spanner on the metal part of the piping (Piping attachment).
-6No.PS##-OMM0005-C

Wire correctly.


Do not use a cable longer than 10m. Wire the DC(-) line(blue) as close as possible to the power supply.
When analogue output is used, install a noise filter (line noise filter, ferrite element, etc.) between the switch-mode power supply and this product. Environment Do not use the product in area that is exposed to corrosive gases, chemicals, sea water, water or steam.


This product is CE marked, it may happen that the set value of product is changed by the noise impressed in excess.

-7No.PS##-OMM0005-C



The fluid and ambient temperatures should be -5 to 50 oC. Operation under low temperature (5 oC or less) leads to cause damage or operation failure due to frozen moist in the fluid or air. Protection against freezing is necessary. Air dryer is recommended for elimination of drain and water. Avoid sudden temperature change even within specified temperature.




There will be a drift on the display and the analogue output of approximate 1% immediately after the power supply is turned on within 10 minutes.

Do not touch the LED during operation.



-8No.PS##-OMM0005-C
-9No.PS##-OMM0005-C

If an accessory is required independently, order with the following part number.
Description Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Front protective cover Lead wire with connector + connector cover R1/8 conversion adapter NPT1/8 conversion adapter DIN rail mounting adapter
: Made to Order
Part number ZS-39-B ZS-39-D ZS-39-01 ZS-39-5G ZS-39-N1 ZS-39-N2 ZS-39-R
Remarks 5 cores, 2 m -
-10No.PS##-OMM0005-C

Output (OUT1) LED (Green): LED is ON when the switch output (OUT1) is ON. Output (OUT2) LED (Red): Led is ON when the switch output (OUT2) is ON. LED display: Displays the current status of pressure, setting mode and error code. button (UP): Selects the mode or increases the ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the peak display mode. button (DOWN): Selects the mode or decreases the ON/OFF set value. Press this button to change to the bottom display mode. button (SET): Press this button to change to another mode and to set a value.

Terms 7 A 7-segment display Analogue output function (Analogue) voltage output Meaning When "8" is shown on the display. It is called 7-segment because 8 consists of 7 pieces of "- (segments)". A function to output the voltage in proportion to the pressure. Refer to "Analogue output function". A function to automatically set up the pressure by having equipment hold and release a workpiece via vacuum adsorption. This function is used in an application where vacuum adsorption of a workpiece is confirmed by a Pressure switch. Indicates the minimum pressure reached up to that moment. The problem of the switch output turning ON and OFF repeatedly around the set value at high frequency due to the effect of pulsation. A function to delay the response time of switch output in order to prevent chattering. A function to copy a pressure setting value and function setting (excluding fine adjustment of display value). Shows how precisely the pressure can be displayed or set by the digital Pressure switch. When 1 digit = 1 kPa, the pressure is given with an increment of 1kPa, e.g., 1, 2, 3, , 99, 100. With the self-diagnostic function of the Pressure switch, this indicates that there is an error which could cause a switch failure. Refer to "Fine adjustment of display value". A displayed pressure value can be adjusted within the range of 5%R.D. (5% of the displayed value). It is used if a true pressure value is known or to correct the difference of a displayed value of the measurement equipment nearby which measures the same pressure. Abbreviation for full span or full scale; this means the maximum fluctuation range of the Pressure switch rated value. For example, when the output voltage is 1 to 5[V], the F.S. will be 5-1 = 4[V]. (Ref: 1%F.S. = 4 0.01 = 0.04[V]) This is a mode in which each function is set up, and is a separate menu from the pressure setup. If the setting needs to be changed, "F*", each item can be set up. The items to be set up are: display colour, operation mode, output type, response time, display resolution, fine adjustment of display value, auto preset, power-saving mode and security code number. The difference between the pressure switch ON and OFF points, used to prevent chattering Refer to "List of output modes" on page 27. The deviation between displayed pressure value and the true pressure. Insulation resistance of the product itself. The resistance between an electricical circuit and the pressure switch body. How fine the rated pressure range can be displayed (example: If a product for 0 to 1 MPa can display pressure by 0.001 MPa, the display resolution is 1/1000.) The LED that turns on when the switch output is on. The unit of pressure used on the display.
Auto preset
B C
Bottom value display Chattering Chattering preventing function Copy function
Error indication Fine adjustment mode Fine adjustment of display value
Indication accuracy Insulation resistance Indication resolution Indicator LED Indication unit
Terms K M Key lock function Manual setup Master Pressure switch Max. applied voltage Max. load current Max. (Min) load impedance Measurement mode Min. setting unit N Normal output
Meaning A function that locks the setting buttons so that no accidental setting changes can be made. Manual pressure set up without using auto preset. This term is used to distinguish from the pressure set up using auto preset. A Pressure switch whose settings are copied when using the copy function. The maximum value of applied voltage available to the output wire of the NPN output. The maximum current available to the output wire of the switch output. The maximum (minimum) load (resistance value and impedance) which can be connected to the output (output wire) of the analogue current output. The condition in which the pressure is detected and displayed and the switch output is operating. Refer to "digit". The switch output operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure equal to or greater than the set value is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it is the operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure is within the switch output range (P1L to P1H or P2L to P2H). (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 27.) The switch output which uses the NPN transistor for output. There are two choices, hysteresis mode and window comparator mode. The resistance value of a component between the voltage output element and the analogue voltage output. It is indicated as a resistance value which is converted in accordance with the condition in which resistance is directly connected to the voltage output element. There may be an error in the output voltage depending on this output impedance and the input impedance of customers' equipment. (example: If the Pressure switch with output impedance of 1k is connected to the A/D converter to detect the analogue output of 5V, the detected voltage by the A/D converter becomes 5(V) 1(M)/(1(k) + 1(M)) 4.995(V), and there is an error of approximate 0.005 V). The operation type of the switch output. Either normal output or reversed output can be selected (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 27). Displays the maximum pressure reached up to that moment. The size of the port on the switch body with which a device can be connected The switch output that uses the PNP transistor for output. The condition in which the display is turned off to reduce current consumption The pressure-detecting part of a pressure-detecting element. The setting of pressure to determine the point at which the Pressure switch turns on and off. The pressure beyond which the Pressure switch will be damaged.
NPN (open collector) output O Operating mode
Output impedance
Output type P Peak value display Piping-port size PNP (open collector) output Power saving mode Pressure-sensing part Pressure setting Proof pressure
Terms R Rated pressure range
Meaning The pressure range in which the Pressure switch meets the specifications. Values outside of this range can be set if they are within the set pressure range, but cannot be guaranteed to meet the product specifications. Reproducibility of the displayed value for pressure and ON-OFF output operating point when the pressure changes. The difference between the ideal ON voltage and the actual voltage when the switch output is on. It depends on present load current and ideally should be "0". Refer to "Indication resolution". The elapsed time until the ON-OFF output begins operating, since the pressure supplied to the Pressure switch has reached the set value. Generally, the shorter the response time, the better the performance. The switch output operation in which the switch is turned on when pressure equal to or less than the set value is detected. In the (hysteresis mode) window comparator mode, it indicates the operation in which a switch is turned on when pressure is outside the switch output range (n1L to n1H or n2L to n2H). (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 27.) A type of chattering. Refer to "Function selection mode". The pressure range within which the switch output can be set. A Pressure switch whose settings are copied to when using the copy function. Alternatively called "ON-OFF output". Function to change the unit in which the value of pressure is displayed. Only a product with this function can change the unit. A product with Unit selection function cannot be purchased if it is used within Japan. Pressure is indicated only by SI units in Japan. The part of the Pressure switch which is in contact with the detected fluid, such as a pressure sensor, seal, or fitting. An output type which holds the output when the pressure is within a certain range. (Refer to "List of output modes" on page 27.) The ability to withstand a voltage applied between an electrical circuit and the body. If more voltage is applied to the product, the product may be damaged. (voltage mentioned here is not power voltage to activate the product). The function which can adjust the displayed pressure value to "0".
Reversed output
Ripple S Setting of function Setting pressure range Slave Pressure switch Switch output U Unit selection function

Installation
Mounting
: The required tightening torque of the piping port is 1 Nm for M5 (This is equivalent to approximately 1/6 extra tightening after manual tightening) and 7 to 9 Nm for R1/8 and NPT1/8.
Mount with the set screws M3 size (2 pcs.) supplied for direct installation. The required tightening torque of the mounting screws is 0.5 to 0.7 Nm.

Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover (Model: ZS-39-D)
Removal and mounting on DIN rail

It is necessary to prepare a DIN rail adapter for the mounting on the DIN rail. (Model: ZS-39-R) Take care not to bend the claws of the DIN rail adapter when mounting. <Mounting on DIN rail adapter>
Engage the Pressure switch with claw 2 of the DIN rail adapter, then press down on to claw 1until it clicks. <Mounting on DIN rail>
Engage claw 1 of the adapter on to the DIN rail as shown [1], apply force in direction [2], then press downward [3] until claw 2 clicks on to the DIN rail. <Removal from DIN rail>
Move in the direction [1], and remove claw 1 in direction [2] as shown.
Piping
1. Cut the tube end perpendicular. 2. Hold the tube and insert it into the One-touch fitting slowly until it bottoms out.
Warning
Do not use the Pressure switch in a place where electrical static charge will be a problem.
It can cause an error and damage to the system. Allow sufficient tube length to prevent twist and tensile or moment loads from being applied to the fitting or tube. When using a tube manufactured by a company other than SMC, check that its outside diameter tolerance satisfies the following values: 1) Nylon tube: 0.1 mm maximum 2) Soft nylon tube: 0.1 mm maximum 3) Polyurethane tube: +0.15 mm/-2 mm maximum
Wiring
Connection
Connector
Connecting/Disconnecting When mounting the connector, insert it straight into the socket, holding the lever and connector body, and push the connector until the lever hooks into the housing, and locks. When removing the connector, press down the lever to release the hook from the housing and pull the connector straight out.
Connector pin numbers

Z/ISE10(F)Output specification
-A NPN open collector 2 outputs Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 2 V or less
-B PNP open collector 2 outputs Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 2 V or less
-C NPN open collector 1 output Max. 28 V, 80 mA Residual voltage 2 V or less Analogue voltage output Output impedance approx. 1 k
-E PNP open collector 1 output Max. 80 mA Residual voltage 2 V or less Analogue voltage output Output impedance approx. 1 k
Pressure Setting
Measurement mode
Setting the ON and OFF points of the Pressure switch.

Operation When the pressure exceeds a set value, the Pressure switch will be turned ON. When the pressure falls below the set value by the amount of hysteresis or more, the Pressure switch will be turned OFF. The default setting of the output set value is the central value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. If this condition, shown below, is acceptable, then keep these settings.
3, Press the or button to change the set value. The button is to increase and the button is to decrease. Press the value. button once to increase by one digit, and press it continuously to keep increasing the set
Press the set value.
button once to decrease by one digit, and press it continuously to keep decreasing the
4, Press the button to finish the setting. For models with 2 outputs, [P_2] or [n_2] will be displayed. Set as above. The Pressure switch operates within a set pressure range (from P1L to P1H) during window comparator mode. Set P1L (switch lower limit) and P1H (switch upper limit) using the setting procedure above. When reversed output is selected, [n1L] and [n1H] are displayed. Zero clear of Display The display is reset to zero when the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second. For the first operation, always perform zero clear with no pressure applied.
Function Setting
: Some functions are not available depending on part number. All functions are displayed with [F description. If a function is not available, the function is displayed as [---].
Default setting
Unit specification Nil or M P Model ISE10 ZSE10(F) ISE10 ZSE10(F)
See page 24
See page 25
Description Default setting Hysteresis mode Normal output ISE10: 0.500 MPa ZSE10: -50.5 kPa ZSE10F: 50.0 kPa ISE10: 0.050 MPa ZSE10: 5.1 kPa ZSE10F: 5.0 kPa
Select hysteresis mode, window comparator mode or OFF mode. Select reversed output. Set the ON or OFF point of the switch output
Hysteresis
[F 2] Setting of OUT2 See page 28 Same setting as [F 1] OUT1. Other parameter setting
Item [F 3] Response time [F 4] Auto-preset function [F 6] Fine adjustment of display value [F11] Display resolution [F80] Power saving mode [F81] Security code [F90] Setting of all functions [F97] Copy function [F98] Check of output [F99] Reset to the default setting Page page 30 page 31 page 33 page 34 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 39 page 41 page 43 Default setting 2.5 ms Manual 0 1000-split OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal OFF

Only the product with Unit selection function can be set. The displayed unit can be changed, and depends on the pressure range. (kPa/MPa units are available when the product does not have the unit selection function). <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 0]. Press the Select the Display Unit Press the or button to select the display unit. button. Move on to select the display unit.
Press the
button to set.

Unit MPa kPa kgf/cm2 bar psi InHg mmHg ZSE10F 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.02 0.1 1 ZSE10 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 ISE10 0.001 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 -
Set output method of OUT1. The output turns on when the pressure exceeds the set value. The default setting of the output set value is the central value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. For the operation of each setting, refer to "List of output modes" on page 27. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 1]. Press the Select output mode Press the or button to select output mode. button. Move on to setting of output mode.
Press the
button to set.
Select reversed output Press the or button to select reversed output.
[oFF] (unused) selected. Press the Press the button to set. Move on to setting of pressure. button to set.
Pressure Setting Set the pressure based on the setting procedure on page 21. "P" becomes "n" when reversed output is selected. ([P_1] [n_1]) Hysteresis mode: [P_1] Window comparator mode: [P1L][P1H] Press the button to set. Move on to setting of hysteresis.
Setting of Hysteresis Press the or button to select hysteresis.
Press the
button to set.
1: The selected parameter become effective after pressing the
2: After setting, it is possible to move to measurement mode by pressing the 3: When using with OUT1 turned off, select "OFF" in output mode.
Set output method of OUT2. The output turns on when the pressure exceeds the set value. The default setting of the output set value is the central value between the atmospheric pressure and the upper limit of the rated pressure range. For the operation of each setting item, refer to "List of output modes" on page 27. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 2]. Press the Select output mode Press the or button to select output mode. button. Move on to setting of output mode.
Press the
button to set.
Select reversed output Press the or button to select reversed output.
[oFF] (unused) selected. Press the to set. Output mode [Err] selected. Press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. 4 button
Press the
button to set.
Pressure Setting Set the pressure based on the procedure on page 21. "P" becomes "n" when reversed output is selected. ([P_2] [n_2]) Hysteresis mode: [P_2] Window comparator mode: [P2L][P2H] Press the button to set.
Setting of Hysteresis Press the or button to select hysteresis. Press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Setting of [F 2] operation of OUT2 completed
1: The selected parameter becomes effective after pressing the
3: If the output specification is 1 output or Analogue output, the display shows [---], and this function cannot be set. 4: When "Err" is selected in output mode, after normal and reversed display function, the display will return to [F 2]. 5: When using with OUT2 turned off, select "OFF" in output mode.
[F 3] Response time
Press the
button to set.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F 4] Auto-preset completed Press the button during measurement mode to set the pressure. Then press the button again to change the pressure setting, while the display is flashing.
Auto-preset When auto-preset is selected in function selection mode, the set pressure can be calculated and stored from a measured pressure value. The set value is automatically optimized by repeating the suction and release of the workpiece during setting. 1, Selection of auto-preset OUT1 Press the button in measurement mode to display "AP1". (If OUT1 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to move to "AP2"). 2, Preparation of OUT1 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT1 is to be set. 3, Setting of auto-preset value of OUT1 Press the button to display "A1L". After measurement starts, operate the device and change the pressure. When the pressure change is detected, "A1H" will appear automatically, and so continue to operate the device. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while "A1L" is displayed, measurement is stopped and "AP2" will appear). 4, Selection of auto-preset OUT2 Press the button to set "P_1" and "H_1" ("n_1" and "H_1" for reversed mode) and display "AP2". (If OUT2 does not need to be set, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to return to measurement mode). 5, Preparation and setting of OUT2 device Prepare the device for which the pressure of OUT2 is to be set, and perform the setting of OUT2 in the same way as for OUT1. After "A2L" is displayed and measurement starts, the pressure change will be detected, and "A2H" will appear automatically. (If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer when "A2L" is displayed, measurement is stopped and the display will return to measurement mode). 6, Completion of setting Press the button to set "P_2" and "H_2" ("n_2" and "H_2" for reversed mode) and complete auto-preset mode. After that, the display will return to measurement mode. The set values for OUT1 are displayed in auto-preset mode as follows. Normal output Reversed output P_1 = A-(A-B)/4 n_1 = B+(A-B)/4 A = Max. pressure H_1 = (A-B)/2 H_1 = (A-B)/2 B = Min. pressure The set values of OUT2 become as follows "_", i.e. "P_2", "n_2" and "H_2". If this setting is not necessary, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.

This function is used to manually perform fine adjustment of the displayed pressure. It is adjustable within the range 5%R.D. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F 6]. Press the button. Move on to setting of fine adjustment of display value.
Setting of fine adjustment of display value Press the value. or button to change the set pressure
Press the If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while [FSC] is displayed, the adjusted value is set.
button to set.
Press the
button to set.
[F11] Display resolution

This function is used to change the pressure display resolution. This can be used to prevent the digits from flickering on the display. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F11]. Press the Setting of display resolution Press the or button to select display resolution. button. Move on to setting of display resolution.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F11] Display resolution completed
: Not selectable depending on selected display units.
The display resolution selectable unit is MPa, kPa (for ZSE only), kgf/cm2, bar, psi and inHg. The display units kgf/cm2, bar, psi and inHg are selectable only for models with the unit selection function. See [F 0] Unit selection function on page 24.
[F80] Power saving mode

Power saving mode is selectable. When the Pressure switch is left for 30 seconds with no key operation, it will enter power saving mode. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F80]. Press the Setting of power saving mode Press the or button to select power saving mode. button. Move on to setting of power saving mode.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F80] Power saving mode completed
Power saving mode 1 remains enabled until turned off. In power saving mode 1, the brightness of the whole display will be reduced. In power saving mode 2, any key operation will return the normal display. If there is no key operation for 30 seconds or more, the display will return to power saving mode (only in measurement mode). In power saving mode 2, only the decimal points flash, and the point of flashing moves.
[F81] Security code

A security code can be selected, which must be entered to unlock the keys when the keys are locked. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F81]. Press the Setting of security code Press the or button to select security code. button. Move on to setting of security code.
Press the
button to set.
Setting of [F81] Security code completed If the security code is used, it becomes necessary to enter the security code to release the key lock. The security code can be decided optionally by the operator. The default setting is "000". Refer to page 45 for the security code input.
[F90] Setting of all functions

All functions can be set, one after the other. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F90]. Press the Setting of all functions Press the or button to select all functions. button. Move on to setting of all functions.
[on] (used) selected [oFF] (unused) selected Press the to set. button After the change to [oFF] (unused), press the button to set. Return to function selection mode. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer. Setting of each function 1
Measurement mode
1: Setting of functions Every time the Set using the button is pressed, the function steps in the order of Function of settings on page 38. or button.
Refer to each section for the setting details.
Order of Function of setting

Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Selection of display unit Select output mode (OUT1) Select reversed output (OUT1) Setting of pressure (OUT1) Setting of hysteresis (OUT1) Select output mode (OUT2) Select reversed output (OUT2) Setting of pressure (OUT2) Setting of hysteresis (OUT2) Response time Display resolution Auto-preset function Fine adjustment of display value Power saving mode Security code All models All models All models All models All models All models
Function
Applicable model
All models All models All models All models All models Only for the product with output specification of NPN2 and PNP2
: Measurement mode will return from any setting item by pressing the : Function that will be set by the return to the measurement mode.
[F97] Copy function

The set values of pressure and functions (except for corrected value of fine adjustment of display value) can be copied. When the pressure range, output and unit specifications are the same, this function becomes available. The set value can be copied to up to 10 Pressure switches simultaneously. <Connection> Connect the Pressure switches with the power supply turned off. Connect the FUNC terminals of the master Pressure switch and the slave Pressure switches, and then turn on the power supply. The master Pressure switch is the switch from which the setting is to be copied. The slave Pressure switch is the switch to which the setting is to be copied.
Press the
button to set.
The copy ready status is held even if the power supply is turned off. Press the button to start copying. The slave Pressure switch Flashing (Red)
The master Pressure switch Sending/ Receiving Flashing (Red)
Copy completed
Press the button. The copy can be made continuously and the copy ready status can be held even if the power supply is turned off.
Press the
button.
To complete the copy function, press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer.
Setting of [F97] Copy function completed
: If the copy to the slave Pressure switch is not completed, it is detected as a copy function sending/receiving error. Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer to return to measurement mode. Then, check the wiring and specifications of the switch and retry copy function.

Output from the switch can be confirmed. It can be selected to provide or not to provide the output. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F98]. Press the Check of output Press the or button to select check of output. button. Move on to check of output.
If [n] (normal output) is selected, press the button to set. Return to function selection mode.
If [F] (forcibly output) is selected, press the button to set. OUT1 check of output Press the or button to select OUT1 check of output.
If OUT2 output is not provided, press the button to set after returning to [n] (normal output). Return to function selection mode.
If OUT2 output is provided, press the button to set.
Press the button to set after returning to [n] (normal output). Setting of [F98] Check of output completed
Press the button for 2 seconds or longer.
Measurement mode
: If the
button is pressed for 2 seconds or longer, the mode is returned to measurement mode regardless of the current mode.

If the setting of the pressure switch becomes unknown, the default setting can be restored. <Operation> Press the or button in function selection mode to display [F99]. Press the Reset to the default setting Set the display [ON] by pressing the or button, then press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. button. Move on to reset to the default setting.
[oFF] (unused) selected Press the button to set. Return to function selection mode.
Other Settings
The maximum (minimum) pressure from when the power was supplied to this moment is detected and updated. In peak/bottom display mode, this pressure is displayed. For peak display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the maximum pressure and "Hi" starts flashing, and is held. To release holding the display of the maximum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. For bottom display, when the button is pressed for 1 second or longer, the minimum pressure and "Lo" starts flashing and is held. To release holding the display of the minimum pressure, press the button for 1 second or longer again to return to measurement mode. If the and buttons are pressed simultaneously for 1 second or longer while the pressure is being held, the maximum (minimum) values are reset.
Zero clear
A displayed value can be adjusted to zero when the pressure to be measured is within 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) of the pressure at the time of shipment from the factory. (A tolerance range of 1%F.S. may apply due to individual product differences). Press the and buttons simultaneously for 1 second or longer, to clear the display to "0". The display will return to measurement mode automatically.
Key lock
The key lock function is used to prevent errors occurring due to unintentional changes of the set values. If a button operation is performed while the key lock setting is ON, "LoC" is displayed for approximately 1 second. (When the button is pressed, the set pressure will be displayed following "LoC").
<Operation - Without security code input- > 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting "LoC" or "UnL" is displayed. (Selecting or releasing the key lock is carried out in a similar way).
2, Press the
or
3, Press the
<Operation - With security code input- > Locking 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting UnL is displayed.
2, Press the
or
3, Press the
Unlocking 1, Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in measurement mode. The current setting LoC is displayed.
2, Press the
or
3, When the button is pressed, input of the security code will be requested. For how to enter the security code, refer to "How to enter the security code" on page 46.
4, If the security code entered is correct, the display will change to UnL. Press any of the , or buttons to release the key lock and return to measurement mode. If the security code entered is incorrect, FAL will be displayed and the security code must be entered again. If an incorrect security code is entered three times, LoC is displayed and the display will return to measurement mode.
How to change the security code At the time of shipment, the security code is set to 000, but this can be changed to any number. <Operation> 1, After the key lock setting has been completed, perform the first three steps in the unlocking procedure. (page 45). 2, After the security code has been entered and the display changes to UnL, press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. 000 is displayed and a new security code can now be entered. For how to enter the security code, refer to "How to enter the security code". The new security code will be displayed. 3, After checking the security code is as required, press the button for 1 second or longer. The display will return to measurement mode. At this time, if the or button is pressed, any security code changes are lost, and the change of security code procedure must be repeated.
How to enter the security code The first digit will start flashing. Press the or button to select a value. Press the button to set and the next digit will start flashing. (If the button is pressed at the last digit, the first digit will start flashing again). After the setting is completed, press the button for 1 second or longer. (If a key operation is not performed for 30 seconds while entering the security code, the measurement mode will return).
Maintenance
How to reset the product for a power cut or forcible de-energizing The setting of the product will be retained as it was before a power cut or de-energizing. The output condition is also basically recovered to that before a power cut or de-energizing, but may change depending on the operating environment. Therefore, check the safety of the whole installation before operating the product. If the installation is using accurate control, wait until the product has warmed up (approximately 10 to 15 minutes).

The following procedure can be used when the security code has been forgotten. <Operation> Press the button for 5 seconds or longer in of measurement mode. The current setting "UnL" or "LoC" is displayed.
Press the and Then, press the
: There will be change to the display.
(at this time, if another operation is performed or no key operation is performed for 30 seconds, the display will return to measurement mode). Press the and buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds or longer. The display will change to "000" and the security code change mode will return. Refer to "How to change the security code" (page 46) and select a new security code. The new security code will be displayed. Check the security code is as required, and press the The display will return to measurement mode. At this time, if the , or button is pressed, any security code changes will be lost, and the change of security code procedure must be repeated. button for 1 second or longer.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Applicable Pressure switch: ZSE10(F)/ISE10 If the cause of the failure cannot be identified and normal operation can be recovered by replacement with a new Pressure switch, this indicates that the Pressure switch itself is faulty. Pressure switch damage can be caused by the operating environment (network construction, etc.), therefore contact SMC.
The Pressure switch does not operate correctly
The indicator LED is ON
Refer to Fault No.1
Yes No
The switch output is OFF The indicator LED is ON
Refer to Fault No.2
Refer to Fault No.1
Refer to reference No.3 The switch output is chattering Refer to Fault No.4
Refer to Fault No.5
Refer to Fault No.6
Refer to Fault No.7
Refer to Fault No.8
Yes No
Refer to Fault No.9
Refer to Fault No.9
The display flashes
Pressure display difference when using 2 or more Pressure switches
The product is loose
Copy function error
Not able to copy
Slave Pressure switch does not complete copying

Fault No. Fault Output remains ON. Indicator LED remains ON. Output remains OFF. Indicator LED remains OFF. Output remains ON. Indicator LED works correctly. Possible cause Investigation method Countermeasure
(1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check the operation mode, hysteresis and output type. Incorrect pressure (hysteresis mode / window setting comparator mode, normal / reversed output) Product failure Incorrect wiring Product failure Incorrect wiring Check the wiring of the output. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-). Check if PNP is used when NPN should have been selected, or the other way around. Check the wiring of the output. Check if the load is connected directly to DC(+) or DC(-).
Broken lead wire
Check if there is bending stress Correct the wiring conditions. applied to any parts of the lead wire. (adjust the tensile force and (bending radius and tensile force increase the bending radius). applied). Replace the product. Check the wiring. Check that the brown and blue wires Correct the wiring. are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively, and if the output wiring is loose (contact failure). (1) Check the set pressure. (2) Check that the hysteresis range is not too narrow. (3) Check the response time set at initial setting. Check that the response time is not too short. (1) Reset the pressure setting. (2) Increase the hysteresis. (3) Reset the function settings. Replace the product. Reset the pressure setting. Set the pressure setting value so it is not too close to the detected pressure.
Product failure
Incorrect wiring
Product failure Slow switch output response Check the pressure setting. Incorrect pressure Check that the detected pressure and the set pressure value are not setting the same or not too close.
Fault No.
Fault
Investigation method Check that the analogue output is connected to a load.
Non-compliance Analogue output is with the load specification. not provided. 6 (specified accuracy is not satisfied).
(1) Check that the correct load is connected. Connect a suitable load. (2) Check that the impedance of the input equipment (A/D transformer) is suitable. Check if the product satisfies the specified accuracy after 10 minutes warm up time. After energizing, the display and output can drift. For detecting fine pressures, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product. (1) Check that the switch output load (1)(2) Connect the load as current is not more than 80 mA. specified. (2) Check that the connected load (3) Use a relay with a surge satisfies the specifications, and voltage suppressor or check the load for short circuits. take measures to (3) Check that any relay is connected prevent noise. with a surge voltage suppressor. (4) Separate the wiring (4) Check if the wiring is not in the route from any high same route as (or bundled voltage cable or power together with) a high voltage cable cable. or power cable. (1) Remove the noise and the noise source (or take measures to prevent noise interference), and reset the product, or turn off the power supply and turn it on again. (2) Supply a correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. (1) Adjust the pressure to within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from entering the piping. (1) Adjust the pressure to within the set pressure range. (2) Take measures to prevent foreign matter from entering the piping. Return the applied pressure to atmospheric pressure, and retry the zero clear operation. Replace the product.
Product failure
Over current to the output (Er1, Er2)
An over current (1) Check that there is no noise error (Er1, Er2) is Incorrect operation interference such as static displayed. of the internal data electricity, and check for noise of the Pressure System error sources. switch (Er0, Er4, Er6, (2) Check that the power supply Er7, Er8 or Er9) (Er0, Er4, Er6, voltage is within the range 12 to 24 Er7, Er8, Er9) is displayed. VDC 10%. The display shows "HHH". (1) Check that the pressure is not The display above the upper limit of the set Applied pressure shows "LLL". pressure range. is over the upper (2) Check that foreign matter has not limit (HHH). Residual entered the piping. pressure error (Er3) is displayed. (1) Check that the pressure is not Applied pressure is under the lower limit (LLL). below the lower limit of the set pressure range. (2) Check that foreign matter has not entered the piping. Check that during the zero clear operation, pressure above 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S. for compound pressure) was not applied.
Pressure is not atmospheric pressure at zero-clear operation (Er3) Product failure
Fault No.
Fault
Countermeasure
Check that the power supply voltage is Supply the correct voltage within the range 12 to 24 VDC 10%. of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check the wiring to the power supply. Check that the brown and blue wires Correct the wiring. are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and that the output wiring is not loose (contact failure). Check if the factory pressure has changed. Check that the power supply voltage is within the range of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Check if the power saving mode is selected. If the fluctuation is not acceptable, the pressure switch display resolution can be changed Supply the correct voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%. Reset the function settings.
Incorrect wiring
Factory pressure change
Incorrect power supply Indicator turns off. A part of the display misses. Power saving mode
Incorrect wiring
Check the power supply wiring. Check that the brown and blue wires Correct the wiring. are connected to DC(+) and DC(-) respectively and that the output wiring is not loose (contact failure). Replace the product. Turn off the peak / bottom value display mode if not required. (1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring conditions (reduce the tensile force and increase the bending radius). Use the fine adjustment mode to adjust the display if the dispersion is within the display accuracy range. Replace the product.
Product failure The peak / bottom Check if the peak value or bottom value display mode has been value display mode is selected. selected. 10 Display is flashing. Wiring failure (1) Check the power supply wiring. (2) Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead wire.
11
Dispersion within the display accuracy range Product failure
Fault No.
Fault
Possible cause
Countermeasure Install a 5 m filter to prevent foreign matter from entering the pressure port. Also, clean the filter regularly to prevent drainage deposits. Rework the piping. If an excessive tightening torque is applied, the mounting bracket, screws or the product may be damaged. After energizing, the display and output can drift. For detecting fine pressures, warm up the product for 10 to 15 minutes. Replace the product. "M" in the part number means that the unit cannot be changed. (kPaMPa can be selected)
Foreign matter
12
The pressure display accuracy Air or fluid leakage does not satisfy the specifications.
Product failure
13
Improper model selection (Selection of model "without Unit selection function")
Check if there is a "-M" at the end of the part number printed on the product
Product failure 14 The buttons cannot be operated. The product is loose. Key lock mode Product failure Incorrect installation Product failure Check that the panel mount adapter and the product are correctly assembled. Check if the key lock mode is turned on.
Replace the product. Turn off the key lock mode. Replace the product. Mount the product on the panel correctly. Replace the product. Rework the piping. If an excessive tightening torque is applied, the mounting bracket, screws or the product may be damaged. Replace the product. (1) Check the wiring connection at the FUNC terminal. Correct the wiring. (2) Check the power supply wiring. Replace the product.
15
16
Product failure Copy function error Unable to copy Incorrect wiring Product failure
17
Fault No.
Fault
Possible cause
Countermeasure
Incorrect wiring
(1) Correct the wiring. (1) Check the wiring connection at the (2) The maximum transmitting distance of FUNC terminal. the copy function is 4 m. Check the power supply wiring. Shorten the lead wire to (2) Check the lead wire lengths. 4 m or less. The model number of the master Pressure switch and the slave Pressure switch are different from each other. Check the model numbers. Copying is available when the pressure range, output specification and units specification are identical.
18
Slave Pressure Improper model switch does not complete the copy selected function.
The number of connected products for which copying Too many Check the number of connected slave is possible is up to 10 pcs. pressure switches Pressure switches. Reduce the number to connected 10 pcs or less. Product failure Pressure source fluctuation, small hysteresis or the response time is too short. (1) Check the set pressure (hysteresis) (2) Check the response time Replace the product. (1) Check the pressure setting. (2) Reset the function settings. (1) Correct the wiring (2) Correct the wiring conditions (reduce the tensile force and increase the bending radius). Replace the product.
19
The operation is unstable. (chattering)
(1) Check the power supply wiring. Incorrect wiring or (2) Check if there is bending stress applied to any parts of the lead broken lead wire wire. Product failure
Error indication
Error Name Error Display Error Type Troubleshooting Method
Over current Error
Turn the power off and remove the The switch output load current is more cause of the over current. than 80 mA. Then turn the power on. During zero clear operation, pressure above 7%F.S. (3.5%F.S.for Perform zero clear operation again compound pressure) is applied. After 1 second, the mode will return to after restoring the applied pressure to an atmospheric pressure condition. measurement mode. The zero clear range can vary 1%F.S. with individual product differences. Pressure has exceeded the upper limit of the set pressure range. Adjust the applied pressure to a level Pressure has exceeded the lower limit within the set pressure range. of the set pressure range.
Zero-clear Error
Pressurizing Error
System Error
Specifications
Specifications
Model No. Rated pressure range Set pressure range Withstand pressure Minimum display unit Applicable fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection Repeatability Hys teresis Analogue output Hysteresis mode Window comparator mode Voltage output Output voltage (rated pressure range) Linearity Output impedance ZSE10 (vacuum) 0.0 to -101.0 kPa 10.0 to -105.0 kPa 500 kPa 0.1 kPa ZSE10F (compound) -100.0 to 100.0 kPa -105.0 to 105.0 kPa 500 kPa 0.1 kPa Air, inert gases and incombustible gases 12 to 24 VDC 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% or less (Protected against inverse connection) 40 mA or less NPN or PNP open collector output 2 outputs (selectable) 80 mA 28 V (NPN output) 2 V or less (at 80 mA load current) 2.5 ms or less (Chattering-proof function working: 20, 100, 500, 1000 or 2000 ms selected) Provided 0.2%F.S. 1 digit 0 to variable 1 to 5 V 2.5%F.S. 1%F.S. approx. 1 k 3 1/2 digits, 7-segment display, colour display (red) 2%F.S. 1 digit (at ambient temperature 253 oC) LED is ON when output is ON. OUT1: Green OUT2: Red IP40 Operation: -5 to 50 oC, Storage: -10 to 60 oC (No condensation or freezing) Operation, Storage: 35 to 85%RH (No condensation) 1000 VAC, 1 minute Between lead block and case 50 M or more at 500 VDC Between lead block and case
o 1
ISE10 (positive pressure) -0.100 to 1.000 MPa -0.105 to 1.050 MPa 1.5 MPa 0.001 MPa
0.6 to 5 V 2.5%F.S.
Display Display accuracy Indicator LED Enclosure Environ Ambient humidity range ment Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Temperature characteristics Ambient temperature range
2%F.S. (25 C reference) Oil resistant vinyl cabtyre cable 5 cores 3.5, 2 m Sectional area of conductor: 0.15 mm2 (AWG26) Outside diameter of insulator: 1.0 mm CE, UL (CSA), RoHS
Lead wire
Standard
1: If the applied voltage fluctuates around the set value, the hysteresis must be set to more than the fluctuation width. Otherwise, chattering will occur.
Model No. Port size Material of Wetted parts Pressure sensing part Piping port With lead wire and connector attached (5-core, 2 m) Without lead wire and connector M5 M50.8 M5R M50.8 Silicone C3602 (Electro less nickel plating) O-ring: HNBR 55 g 63 g 01 R1/8 M50.8 N01 NPT1/8 M50.8
Weight
15 g
23 g
Analogue output
Voltage output
Rated pressure range 0.0 to -101.0 kPa -100.0 to 100.0 kPa -0.100 to 1.000 MPa
A -0.1 MPa
B 0 -100 kPa 0
C -101 kPa 100 kPa 1 MPa
Dimensions
Side piping
Z/ISE10(F)-M5--
Rear piping
Z/ISE10(F)-M5R--
Side piping
Z/ISE10(F)-01--
Side piping
Z/ISE10(F)-N01--
Panel mount side piping

Z/ISE10(F)-M5-- + ZS-39-B
Panel mount rear piping

Z/ISE10(F)-M5R-- + ZS-39-B
Panel mount side piping + Front protective cover

Z/ISE10(F)-M5--D
Panel mount rear piping + Front protective cover

Z/ISE10(F)-M5R--D
DIN rail mounted side piping

Z/ISE10(F)-M5--R
Revision history A: Revision B: Revision C: Modified errors in text.
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer. 2009-2011 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved No.PS##-OMM0005-C
Ai" Checke": Elec$" nic P"e##%"e S'i$ch
!;@1
F;88;C @41 5:?@>A/@5;:? 35B1: .18;C C41: 01?53:5:3, ?181/@5:3 -:0 4-:085:3 @41 A5> C41/71>:E81/@>;:5/ #>1??A>1 %C5@/4. H;C @; 4-:081
GD; :;@ 0>;<, 45@ ;> -<<8E 1D/1??5B1 ?4;/7 (980 9/?2) @; @41 <>;0A/@. &41 5::1> <->@? /-: .1 0-9-310 81-05:3 @; 9-82A:/@5;: 1B1: 52 @41 ?C5@/4 /-?1 .;0E 5? :;@ 0-9-310. G&41 @1:?581 ?@>1:3@4 ;2 @41 81-0 C5>1 5? 49 !. ED/1105:3 @45? B-8A1 /-: /-A?1 .>1-70;C:. H;80 @41 .;0E C41: 4-:085:3 @41 <>;0A/@. GD; :;@ 5:?1>@ 91@-8 C5>1? ;> ;@41> 2;>153: ;.61/@? 5:@; @41 <>1??A>1 91-?A>191:@ <;>@. &45? 9-E 0-9-31 @41 <>1??A>1 ?1:?;>, 81-05:3 @; 9-82A:/@5;:.
In$e"nal Ci"c%i$/Wi"ing
Circuit
Brown OUT(+) Main circuit of switch load + 12 to 24 VDC Blue OUT()
S!ecifica$i n#
;018 %C5@/4 ;A@<A@ -D.;<1>-@5:3 <>1??A>1 %1@@5:3 <>1??A>1 >-:31 A<<85/-.81 28A50 I:05/-@5;: 8534@ &19<1>-@A>1 /4->-/@1>5?@5/? $1<1-@-.585@E HE?@1>1?5? L;-0 B;8@-31 L;-0 /A>>1:@ L1-7-31 /A>>1:@ I:@.B;8@-31.0>;<
NPN Source type Input unit
#%1000 #>1??A>1 %1@ #>1??A>1: "! 1 -0.1 @; 0.45 ###>1??A>1
#%1100 %1@ #>1??A>1: "! #-
O!e"a$i n Man%al
PS1000/PS1100
&4-:7 E;A 2;> <A>/4-?5:3 @41 % C #%1000/#%1100 %1>51? A5> C41/71>: E81/@>;:5/ #>1??A>1 %C5@/4. #81-?1 >1-0 @45? 9-:A-8 /->12A88E .12;>1 ;<1>-@5:3 @41 <>;0A/@ -:0 9-71 ?A>1 E;A A:01>?@-:0 @41 <>;0A/@, 5@? /-<-.585@51? -:0 8595@-@5;:?. #81-?1 711< @45? 9-:A-8 4-:0E 2;> 2A@A>1 >121>1:/1.
-0.1 @; 0.4
A5>/!;:-/;>>;?5B1 :;:-28-99-.81 3-? %C5@/4 "!: >10 LED @A>:? ;: I3%F.%. ;> 81?? I1%F.%. ;> 81?? 4%F.%. ;> 81?? 12 @; 24 (DCI10%, $5<<81(<-<) 10% ;> 81?? 5 @; 40 9A 1 9A ;> 81?? 5 ( ;> 81?? 0 @; 60 L ()5@4 :; /;:01:?-@5;:) M ;> 9;>1 (-@ 500 (DC .E 913-91@1>) .1@C11: 85B1 <->@? -:0 /-?1 1000 (AC 50/60 HF 2;> 1 95:A@1 .1@C11: 85B1 <->@? -:0 /-?1 10 @; 500 HF #A8?1 C50@4 1.5 99 ;> -//181>-@5;: 98 9/?2 (-@ @41 ?9-881> B5.>-@5;:) 5: *, +, , 05>1/@5;:? (2 4;A>?) (D1-1:1>35F10) 980 9/?2 *, +, , 05>1/@5;:? (3 @591? 2;> 1-/4 05>1/@5;:) (D1-1:1>35F10) 5 3 (ED/8A05:3 81-0 C5>1) $06: J6 >10A/1>, $07: 1/4K >10A/1> I#40 G>;991@ ;58->1?5?@-:@ B5:E8 /-.@5>1 /;01 2 /;>1?, J2.55, 3 9 C>;?? ?1/@5;:: 0.18 992, 5:?A8-@;> ".D.: 0.96 99 %1:?;> <->@: %585/;:, B;0E <->@: #B&/#A, "->5:3: H!B$
Hysteresis is the pressure difference between ON press. and OFF press. Setting Pressure t Switch turns ON when the pressure is larger than setting pressure. Switch turns ON when the pressure is smaller than setting pressure. High Vacuum(PS1100) High Pressure(PS1000) Set. Press. ON Hys. OFF Atmospheric Pressure
"<1>-@5:3 1:B5>;:91:@
G&45? <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 5? :;@ C-@1><>;;2. D; :;@ A?1 5: - 8;/-@5;: C41>1 5@ /;A80 .1 ?<8-?410 .E C-@1> ;> ;58. G&41 9-D59A9 ;<1>-@5:3 <>1??A>1 ;2 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 5? 1 #-. D; :;@ -<<8E <>1??A>1 1D/1105:3 1 #-.
Example of connection with a PLC(Sequence contoller)

(In case of Source type input unit ) Brown Switch Input
Safe$) In#$"%c$i n#
&41?1 ?-21@E 5:?@>A/@5;:? ->1 5:@1:010 @; <>1B1:@ 4-F->0;A? ?5@A-@5;:? -:0/;> 1=A5<91:@ 0-9-31. &41?1 5:?@>A/@5;:? 5:05/-@1 @41 81B18 ;2 <;@1:@5-8 4-F->0 C5@4 @41 8-.18? ;2 "C-A@5;:", " )->:5:3" ;> "D-:31>". &41E ->1 -88 59<;>@-:@ :;@1? 2;> ?-21@E -:0 9A?@ .1 2;88;C10 5: -005@5;: @; I:@1>:-@5;:-8 ?@-:0->0? (I%"/IEC), J-<-: I:0A?@>5-8 %@-:0->0? (JI%) -:0 ;@41> ?-21@E >13A8-@5;:?.
D1?53: -:0 ?181/@5;:

G"<1>-@1 C5@4 @41 /;>>1/@ <;C1> ?A<<8E B;8@-31. "<1>-@5;: C5@4 B;8@-31? ;@41> @4-: @41 ?<1/52510 B-8A1? /-: /-A?1 25>1 -:0 181/@>5/ ?4;/7. GD; :;@ A?1 - 8;-0 C45/4 31:1>-@1? ?A>31 B;8@-31. &41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 ;A@<A@ 4-? - ?A>31 B;8@-31 ?A<<>1??;>, .A@ 5@ /-: .1 0-9-310 52 ?A>31 B;8@-31 5? >1<1-@108E -<<8510. )41: @41 <>;0A/@ 5? A?10 @; 0>5B1 05>1/@8E - 8;-0 C45/4 31:1>-@1? ?A>31 B;8@-31, ?A/4 -? >18-E ;> ?;81:;50 B-8B1, A?1 - @E<1 C5@4 - .A58@-5: ?A>31 ?A<<>1??;>. G)41: @41>1 5? - 9-/45:1 ;> 1=A5<91:@ 31:1>-@5:3 8->31 ?A>31 (9-3:1@5/ @E<1 852@1>, 4534 2>1=A1:/E 5:0A/@5B1 2A>:-/1, 9;@;>, 1@/.) :1-> @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4, @45? /-: >1?A8@ 5: 9-82A:/@5;: (05?<8-E ;2 5:/;>>1/@ B-8A1), 01@1>5;>-@5;: -:0 0-9-31 ;2 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 5:@1>:-8 18191:@?. &-71 91-?A>1? -3-5:?@ @41 ?A>31 ?;A>/1?, -:0 <>1B1:@ @41 85:1? 2>;9 /;95:3 5:@; /8;?1 /;:@-/@. GB1 ?A>1 @; ;<1>-@1 @41 1=A5<91:@ C5@45: 5@? 9-D59A9 ;<1>-@5:3 <>1??A>1 -:0 ?1@ <>1??A>1 >-:31. "<1>-@5;: ;A@?501 @41 <>1??A>1 >-:31 9-E /-A?1 - 2-58A>1. G!1B1> A?1 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 C5@4 /;>>;?5B1 -:0 5:28-99-.81 3-?1? ;> 28A50?. GI2 @41 1:@1>5:3 ;2 2;>153: 9-@1>5-8 @; @41 28A50 5? <;??5.81, 5:?@-88 -:0 <5<1 - 258@1> ;> ?1<->-@;> @; @41 5:81@ @; -B;50 2-58A>1 -:0 9-82A:/@5;:. G&41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 5? CE 9->710, .A@ :;@ 599A:1 @; 8534@:5:3 ?@>571?. &-71 91-?A>1? -3-5:?@ 8534@:5:3 ?@>571? 5: @41 ?E?@19. G"<1>-@5;: A:01> 8;C @19<1>-@A>1 81-0? @; /-A?1 0-9-31 ;> ;<1>-@5;: 2-58A>1 0A1 @; 2>;F1: 9;5?@ 5: @41 28A50 ;> -5>. GF;> @41 @C;-C5>1 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4, /A>>1:@ 28;C? @; @41 8;-0 @; ;<1>-@1 @41 5:@1>:-8 /5>/A5@ (81-7-31 /A>>1:@) 1B1: C41: 5@ 5? ;22. (1 9A ;> 81??) I2 @41 8;-0 ;<1>-@5:3 /A>>1:@ (5:<A@ ;22 /A>>1:@ 2;> @41 /;:@>;881>) 5? :;@ 3>1-@1> @4-: @41 81-7-31 /A>>1:@, - ?C5@/4 >1?1@ 2-58A>1 C588 ;//A>, (?C5@/4 ?@-E? ;:). )41: : <>1??A>1 ?C5@/41? ->1 /;::1/@10 5: <->-8818, @41 /A>>1:@ C45/4 28;C? @; @41 8;-0 C588 .1 9A8@5<8510 .E :. G&41 5:<A@ -:0 @41 ;A@<A@ /-: .1 >1B1>?10 01<1:05:3 ;: @41 ?@->@5:3-A< @591 (1 ? ;> 81??) -:0 <>1??A>1 ?1@@5:3 ?@-@1? C41: <;C1> 5? ?A<<8510.
"<1>-@5:3 @19<1>-@A>1 >-:31 I:?A8-@5;: >1?5?@-:/1 2 )5@4?@-:0 B;8@-31 (5.>-@5;: >1?5?@-:/1 I9<-/@ >1?5?@-:/1 -?? #;>@ ?5F1 E:/8;?A>1 L1-0 C5>1 )1@@10 <->@ 9-@1>5-8
Switch Specifications 0.4 0.2 0 -0.1
Blue
COM
Ca%$i n: Wa"ning: Dange":

O!e"a$ "
CA'&I"! 5:05/-@1? - 4-F->0 C5@4 - 8;C 81B18 ;2 >5?7 C45/4, 52 :;@ -B;5010, /;A80 >1?A8@ 5: 95:;> ;> 9;01>-@1 5:6A>E. )A$!I!G 5:05/-@1? - 4-F->0 C5@4 - 9105A9 81B18 ;2 >5?7 C45/4, 52 :;@ -B;5010, /;A80 >1?A8@ 5: 01-@4 ;> ?1>5;A? 5:6A>E. DA!GE$ 5:05/-@1? - 4-F->0 C5@4 - 4534 81B18 ;2 >5?7 C45/4, 52 :;@ -B;5010, C588 >1?A8@ 5: 01-@4 ;> ?1>5;A? 5:6A>E.
(In case of Sink type input unit)

Blue
Input PNP Sink type Input unit COM
Switch
Brown
&45? ;<1>-@5;: 9-:A-8 5? 5:@1:010 2;> @4;?1 C4; 4-B1 7:;C81031 ;2 9-/45:1>E A?5:3 <:1A9-@5/ 1=A5<91:@, -:0 4-B1 ?A225/51:@ 7:;C81031 ;2 -??19.8E, ;<1>-@5;: -:0 9-5:@1:-:/1 ;2 ?A/4 1=A5<91:@. ":8E @4;?1 <1>?;:? ->1 -88;C10 @; <1>2;>9 -??19.8E, ;<1>-@5;: -:0 9-5:@1:-:/1. $1-0 -:0 A:01>?@-:0 @45? ;<1>-@5;: 9-:A-8 /->12A88E .12;>1 -??19.85:3, ;<1>-@5:3 ;> <>;B505:3 9-5:@1:-:/1 @; @41 <>;0A/@.
%1@@5:3 ;2 #>1??A>1 %C5@/4

G'?1 @41 /-85.>-@5;: -06A?@91:@ @; ?1@ "! <>1??A>1. G$;@-@1 /8;/7C5?1 @; 5:/>1-?1 @41 ?1@ <>1??A>1. F;> ?1@@5:3 B-/AA9,>;@-@1 -:@5/8;/7C5?1. GF;> ?1@@5:3, A?1 - 28-@ .8-01 ?/>1C0>5B1> ?A5@-.81 2;> @>5991>. $;@-@1 8534@8E @; -06A?@. G&41>1 5? - ?@;< <>;B5010 @; <>1B1:@ @41 @>5991> 2>;9 >;@-@5:3 .1E;:0 5@? 8595@?. $;@-@5;: .1E;:0 @41 8595@? /-: 0-9-31 @41 @>5991> A06A?@ @41 @>5991> 31:@8E C5@45: @41 >;@-@5;: -:381.
High vacuum
High pressure
Pressure setting trimmer
PS1000 ON OFF PS1100 ON OFF
Safe$) In#$"%c$i n#
)5>5:3
Wa"ning
D n $ di#a##emble, m dif) (incl%ding changing $he !"in$ed ci"c%i$ b a"d) " "e!ai". A: 5:6A>E ;> 2-58A>1 /-: >1?A8@. D n $ !e"a$e $he !" d%c$ %$#ide f $he #!ecifica$i n#. D; :;@ A?1 2;> 28-99-.81 ;> 4->92A8 28A50?. F5>1, 9-82A:/@5;:, ;> 0-9-31 @; @41 <>;0A/@ /-: >1?A8@. (1>52E @41 ?<1/525/-@5;:? .12;>1 A?1. D n $ !e"a$e in an a$m #!he"e c n$aining flammable " e(!l #i&e ga#e#. F5>1 ;> -: 1D<8;?5;: /-: >1?A8@. &45? <>;0A/@ 5? :;@ 01?53:10 @; .1 1D<8;?5;: <>;;2. D n $ %#e $he !" d%c$ in a !lace 'he"e #$a$ic elec$"ici$) i# a !" blem. "@41>C5?1 5@ /-: /-A?1 2-58A>1 ;> 9-82A:/@5;: ;2 @41 ?E?@19. If %#ing $he !" d%c$ in an in$e"l cking ci"c%i$: * P" &ide a d %ble in$e"l cking #)#$em, f " e(am!le a mechanical #)#$em * Check $he !" d%c$ "eg%la"l) f " !" !e" !e"a$i n "@41>C5?1 9-82A:/@5;: /-: >1?A8@, /-A?5:3 -: -//501:@. The f ll 'ing in#$"%c$i n# m%#$ be f ll 'ed d%"ing main$enance: * T%"n ff $he ! 'e" #%!!l) * S$ ! $he ai" #%!!l), e(ha%#$ $he "e#id%al !"e##%"e and &e"if) $ha$ $he ai" i# "elea#ed bef "e !e"f "ming main$enance. "@41>C5?1 -: 5:6A>E /-: >1?A8@.
GI:/;>>1/@ C5>5:3 9-E /-A?1 0-9-31 @; @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4, .>1-70;C: -:0 9-82A:/@5;:. C;:25>9 @41 /;8;A> ;2 @41 C5>1? C5@4 @41 ;<1>-@5;: 9-:A-8 .12;>1 C5>5:3. G)5>5:3 -<<8E5:3 >1<1-@10 .1:05:3 -:0 @1:?581 ?@>1?? @; @41 81-0 C5>1 /-: .>1-7 @41 /5>/A5@. G&41 >1/;991:010 .1:0 >-05A? ;2 @41 81-0 C5>1 5? 6 @591? @41 ;A@?501 05-91@1> ;2 @41 ?41-@4, ;> 33 @591? @41 ;A@?501 05-91@1> ;2 @41 5:?A8-@5;: 9-@1>5-8, C45/41B1> 5? 8->31>. GAB;50 0121/@5B1 5:?A8-@5;: (/>;??10 85:1? C5@4 ;@41> /5>/A5@, 3>;A:0 2-A8@, 0121/@5B1 5:?A8@5;: .1@C11: @1>95:-8?, 1@/.) C5@4 @41 C5>5:3. ED/1??5B1 /A>>1:@ /-: 28;C @4>;A34 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4, C45/4 9-E /-A?1 0-9-31. G$;A@1 @41 C5>1? ?1<->-@18E 2>;9 @41 <;C1> 85:1. &41 /;:@>;8 /5>/A5@ 5:/8A05:3 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 9-E 9-82A:/@5;: 0A1 @; :;5?1. GI2 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 5? @A>:10 ;: C5@4 :; 8;-0 /;::1/@10 @; @41 ?C5@/4, ;B1> /A>>1:@ C588 28;C, /-A?5:3 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 @; .>1-7 5:?@-:@8E. G&41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4 4-? :; >1B1>?1 /;::1/@5;: <>;@1/@5;: 2;> @41 .>;C: (+) -:0 .8A1 (-) ;2 @41 <;C1> ?A<<8E 85:1. GD; :;@ 1D/110 @41 ?<1/52510 9-D59A9 -88;C-.81 8;-0 (24 (DC, 40 9A).
Dimen#i n#
30 25.5 3000
13
PS1000-R06L
PRESS. -0.10.45MPa {-14.6kgf/cm2}
MADE IN JAPAN G
AIRCHECKER
-5:@1:-:/1 -:0 I:?<1/@5;:

G#1>2;>9 >13A8-> 9-5:@1:-:/1 -:0 5:?<1/@5;:?. G)5@4 @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4, 5@ 9-E .1 59<;??5.81 @; 3A->-:@11 ?-21@E 0A1 @; A:1D<1/@10 9-82A:/@5;: ;> 1>>;:1;A? ;<1>-@5;:. #1>2;>9 >13A8-> 5:?<1/@5;:? -:0 /;:25>9 :;>9-8 ;<1>-@5;:. G'?1 - ?;2@ /8;@4 @; /81-: @41 <>1??A>1 ?C5@/4. F;> 41-BE ?@-5:?, A?1 - /8;@4 ?;-710 C5@4 058A@10 :1A@>-8 01@1>31:@ -:0 2A88E ?=A11F10, @41: C5<1 A< @41 ?@-5:? -3-5: C5@4 - 0>E /8;@4.
Pressure setting trimmer LED display
H ' $ O"de"
Ca%$i n
D n $ $ %ch $he $e"minal# and c nnec$ "# 'hile $he ! 'e" i# n. "@41>C5?1 181/@>5/ ?4;/7, 9-82A:/@5;: ;> 0-9-31 @; @41 <>;0A/@ /-: >1?A8@. Af$e" main$enance i# c m!le$e, !e"f "m a!!" !"ia$e f%nc$i nal in#!ec$i n# and leak $e#$#. %@;< ;<1>-@5;: 52 @41 1=A5<91:@ 0;1? :;@ 2A:/@5;: <>;<1>8E ;> @41>1 5? 81-7-31 ;2 28A50. )41: 81-7-31 ;//A>? 2>;9 <->@? ;@41> @4-: @41 <5<5:3, @41 <>;0A/@ 9534@ .1 2-A8@E. D5?/;::1/@ @41 <;C1> ?A<<8E -:0 ?@;< @41 28A50 ?A<<8E. D; :;@ -<<8E 28A50 A:01> 81-75:3 /;:05@5;:?. %-21@E /-::;@ .1 -??A>10 5: @41 /-?1 ;2 A:1D<1/@10 9-82A:/@5;:.
PS 10 00 - R06 L 10 11 Output specification Lead wire length L 3m CE-compliant Nil Q No CE-compliant For Positive pressure
30
10
Pressure (MPa)
Se$$ing
A dimension table 6 reducer 1/4 reducer
For vacuum and residual puressure
Application One-touch fittings HLT KQ2 SY 06/07-M5 Other Series KQ2/KS Series KJ
URL http://www.smcworld.com
A 16 13 16
Piping specification R06 R07 6 reducer 1/4 reducer
Akihabara UDX 15F, 4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPAN Phone: +81 3-5207-8249 Fax: +81 3-5298-5362
!;@1: %<1/525/-@5;:? ->1 ?A.61/@ @; /4-:31 C5@4;A@ <>5;> :;@5/1 -:0 -:E ;.853-@5;: ;: @41 <->@ ;2 @41 9-:A2-/@A>1>. H 2010 % C C;><;>-@5;: A88 $534@? $1?1>B10

Operation Manual

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Operation Manual

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

No.

Digital Pressure Switch

Caution : Warning : Danger :

Limited warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements

Limited warranty and Disclaimer

Do not operate the product outside of the specifications.

Do not operate in an atmosphere containing flammable or explosive gases.

Do not use the product in a place where static electricity is a problem.

Do not exceed the specified maximum allowable load.

Applicable fluid is air, inert gases and incombustible gases.

Use the specified measurement flow rate and operating pressure.

Reserve a space for maintenance.

Never mount a Pressure switch in a location that will be used as a foothold.

Do not perform wiring while the power is on.

Confirm proper insulation of wiring.

Do not use in an area where surges are generated.

Do not use a load which generates surge voltage.

Mount the product in a place that is not exposed to vibration or impact.

Do not use the product in an environment that is exposed to temperature cycle.

Do not expose the product to direct sunlight.

Keep within the specified fluid and ambient temperatures range.

Do not operate close to a heat source, or in a location exposed to radiant heat.

Adjustment and Operation Turn the power on after connecting a load.

Do not short-circuit the load.

Do not press the setting buttons with a sharp pointed object.

Perform settings suitable for the operating conditions.

Do not touch the LCD during operation.

Perform regular maintenance and inspections.

Perform drainage regularly.

Model Identification and how to order

Summary of Product parts

Definition and terminology

Hysteresis Hysteresis mode

NPN (open collector) (output)

Peak hold mode Piping-port size Pressure setting

Terms R Rated pressure range

Response time Ripple V Voltage resistance

Window comparator mode Zero clear (function)

Mounting and Installation

Internal circuit and wiring example

-21 Switch output NPN open collector output 2 outputs Max. 30 V, 80 mA

1-output type with the failure predictive function

Failure predictive function

Bottom hold mode

Bottom hold mode

Wrong pressure setting

(1) Check the set pressure.

(1) Reset the pressure setting.

Output remains off. LED works correctly.

Lead wire breakage Product failure

Correct the wiring.

Slow switch output response

Incorrect pressure setting

Incorrect wiring Non-compliance with the load spec.

Analog output is not provided. (Specified accuracy is not satisfied.)

Connect a proper load.

Over current to the output (E2, CE1, 2)

An over current error (E2, CE1, 2) is indicated.

Check if the pressure over 7%F.S. of the atmospheric pressure is applied.

Supply power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.

Indicated values fluctuate.

Factory pressure Check if the factory pressure is change changed.

Possible cause Incorrect power supply

Countermeasure Supply power supply voltage of 12 to 24 VDC 10%.